Patent Publication Number: US-2005123533-A1

Title: Prodrugs activated by targeted catalytic proteins

Description:
RELATED APPLICATIONS  
      This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 07/773,042, filed Oct. 10, 1991, incorporated herein by reference. This application is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 740,501, filed Aug. 5, 1991, hereby incorporated by reference. This application is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 190,271, filed May 4, 1988, a continuation-in-part of PCT/US89/01951, filed May 4, 1989, a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 700,210, filed Jun. 12, 1991, a continuation-in-part of PCT/US89/01950, filed May 4, 1989, a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 07/761,868, filed Nov. 4, 1991, and a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 498,225, filed Mar. 23, 1990; and, each of these predessor applications is also incorporated herein by reference. 
    
    
     FIELD OF THE INVENTION  
      The present invention provides methods and compounds for providing suitable prodrugs of cytotoxic agents that are activated by enzymes or catalytic antibodies.  
     BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION  
      Many pharmaceutical compounds such as antiviral, immunosuppresive, and cytotoxic cancer chemotherapy agents generally have undesirable toxic effects on normal tissues. Such effects, which include damage to bone marrow (with consequent impairment of blood cell production) and gastrointestinal mucosa, alopecia, and nausea, limit the dose of pharmaceutical compound that can be safely administered and thereby reduce the potential efficacy.  
      Prodrugs of Antineoplastic Agents  
      a. Nucleoside Analogs  
      A number of nucleoside analogs have utility as antitumor agents, including fluorouracil, fluorodeoxyuridine, fluorouridine, arabinosyl cytosine, mercaptopurine riboside, thioguanosine, arabinosyl fluorouracil, azauridine, azacytidine, fluorcytidine, fludarabine. Such drugs generally act by conversion to nucleotide analogs that either inhibit biosynthesis of important nucleotides or that are incorporated into nucleic acids, resulting in defective RNA or DNA.  
      5-Fluorouracil (5-FU) is a major antineoplastic drug with clinical activity in a variety of solid tumors, such as cancers of the colon and rectum, head and neck, liver, breast, and pancreas. 5-FU has a low therapeutic index. The size of the dose that is administered is limited by toxicity, reducing the potential efficacy that would be obtained if higher concentrations could be attained near tumor cells.  
      5-FU must be anabolized to the level of nucleotides (e.g., fluorouridine- or fluorodeoxyuridine-5′-phosphates) in order to exert its potential cytotoxicity. The nucleosides corresponding to these nucleotides (5-fluorouridine and 5-fluoro-2′-deoxyuridine) are also active antineoplastic agents, and in some model systems are substantially more potent than 5-FU, probably because they are more readily converted to nucleotides than is 5-FU.  
      AraC, also called arabinosylcytosine, 1-β-D-arabinofuranosylcytosine, cytarabine, cytosine-β-D-arabinofuranoside and β-cytosine arabinoside, is a widely used anti-cancer drug, albeit with some major disadvantages (see below). Currently AraC is used to treat both myelogenous and lymphocytic leukemias and non-Hodgkin&#39;s lymphomas. Used alone it has resulted in a 20-40% remission of acute leukemia and, in combination with other chemotherapeutic agents, has yielded greater than 50% remission (Calabresi, et al., “In The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics”. Eds. Gilman, A. G., et al., New York: Macmillian Publishing Company, (1985):1272).  
      One of the disadvantages of AraC as a cancer drug is its rapid catabolism by deaminases. Human liver contains high levels of deoxycytidine deaminase which converts AraC to Ara-Uracil, an inactive metabolite. This rapid catabolism results in a t 1/2  in humans of 3-9 minutes following parenteral administration (Baguley, et al.,  Cancer Chemotherapy Reports  55 (1971):291-298). Compounding this problem, only cells undergoing DNA synthesis are susceptible to the drug&#39;s effect and therefore, one must maintain a toxic concentration until all cells of an asynchronously growing tumor pass through S-phase. Unfortunately, this means that the optimum dose schedule of AraC involves a slow intravenous infusion over many hours on each of 5 days, thus requiring a hospital stay. Prolonged application leads to the major problem of general toxicity among rapidly dividing normal cells, leading to bone marrow suppression, infection, and hemorrhage. Another problem encountered using this drug is the resistance to AraC eventually developed by cells, presumably due to selection of cells with low kinase activity, or an expanded pool of deoxy CTP.  
      Prodrug derivatives of AraC have been synthesized in order to: 1) protect AraC from rapid degradation by cytidine deaminase; 2) act as molecular depots of AraC and thereby simplify drug dose schedules; 3) act as carrier molecules for transport on serum proteins and facilitate cellular uptake; or 4) overcome resistance of cells with low kinase activity. AraC derivatives substituted at the 5′ position of the arabinose or the N4 position of the cytidine ring have been found to be cytidine deaminase-resistant. Acting as carrier molecules that protect AraC from degradation by cytidine deaminase, lipophilic 5′-ester derivatives (Neil, et al.,  Biochem. Pharmacol.  21 (1971):465-475; Gish, et al.,  J. Med. Chem.  14 (1971):1159-1162) and N4-acyl derivatives (Aoshima, et al.,  Cancer Res.  36 (1976):2726-2732) of AraC have been shown to possess higher antitumor activity than AraC in leukemic mice.  
      All of the above prodrug derivatives are designed to be administered systemically as the parent drug itself is administered. The side effects of the prodrug arising out of the non-tumor-specific toxicity are very similar, if not identical to the systemic application of the parent drug, Ara-C. These prodrugs are presumably acting as molecular depots of Ara-C and thus prolonging the time of drug availability.  
      Some prodrugs of other antineoplastic nucleoside analogs are also known. Such prodrugs are generally acyl derivatives of the nucleoside analogs; the acyl groups are removed by endogenous esterase activity following administration. Some of these prodrugs of arabinosyl cytosine (Neil, et al.,  Cancer Research  30 (1970):1047-1054; Neil, et al.,  Biochem Pharmacol.  20 (1971):3295-3308; Gish, et. al.,  J. Med. Chem.  14 (1971):1159-1162; Aoshima, et al.,  Cancer Research  36 (1976):2762-2732 or fluorodeoxyuridine (Schwendener, et al.,  Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm.  126 (1985):660-666) provide active drug for a period longer than would occur after administration of the parent drug.  
      However, such prodrugs do not selectively deliver the drug to tumor tissue; enhanced toxicity often accompanies enhanced antitumor efficacy (Schwendener, et al.,  Biochem. Biophy. Res. Comm.  126 (1985):660-666).  
      Like 5FU and Ara-C, the size of the dose of other antineoplastic nucleoside analogs (including but not limited to fluorouracil arabinoside, mercaptopurine riboside, arabinosyl adenine, or fluorodeoxyuridine) or their prodrugs that is administered is limited by toxicity, reducing the potential efficacy that would be obtained if higher concentrations could be attained near tumor cells.  
      Previous suggestions for targeted prodrugs of antineoplastic nucleoside analogs are unsatisfactory. Bagshawe, et al., Patent Application WO 88/07378, proposed that the corresponding nucleotides of antineoplastic nucleosides could be converted back to the nucleoside with an appropriate enzyme; Senter, et al., Patent Application EP 88112646, similarly suggest the use of fluorouridine monophosphate to be activated by the enzyme alkaline phosphatase conjugated to an antibody that binds to a tumor cell surface antigen. These proposals fail to take into account the high and ubiquitous activity of enzymes which convert nucleotides to nucleosides (e.g., 5′nucleotidase) in blood and tissues, Nucleotides (nucleoside phosphates) are therefore not useful for targeted delivery of antineoplastic nucleoside analogs.  
      b. Alkylating Agents  
      Nitrogen mustard alkylating agents are an important class of antineoplastic drugs. Examples of antineoplastic alkylating agents with clinical utility are: cyclophosphamide, melphalan, chlorambucil, or mechlorethamine. These agents share, as a common structural feature, a bis-(2-chloroethyl) grouping on a nitrogen which can alkylate and thereby damage nucleic acids, proteins, or other important cellular structures. The cytotoxic activity of alkylating agents is less dependent upon the cell cycle status of their targets than is the case for antimetabolites that affect nucleic acid synthesis. For this reason, the cytotoxicity of alkylating agents can be less selective for rapidly dividing cells (e.g., many tumors) relative to normal tissues, but on the other hand, it is more completely effective against populations of cells that are not synchronized in their cell cycles.  
      Previous attempts at designing targeted prodrugs of nitrogen mustard compounds have been unsuccessful. Bagshawe, et al., Patent Application WO 88/078378, disclose benzoic acid nitrogen mustard glutamides as prodrugs which are only 5 to 10 fold lower in toxicity than the corresponding activated drugs; these authors themselves state that for clinical use, the prodrug must be at least 100 times less toxic than the drug.  
      Kerr, et al.,  Cancer Immunol. Immunother.  31 (1990):202-206, disclose melphalan-N-β-hydroxyphenoxyacetamide (an amide derivative of melphalan) as a potential prodrug to be activated with the enzyme penicillin-V-amidase (PVA). While this prodrug was in fact more than 100 fold less toxic than melphelan to particular cell lines in culture, pretreatment of cells with an antibody-PVA conjugate failed to enhance the toxicity of the prodrug because PVA hydrolyzed the phenoxyacetamide bond of the prodrug too slowly to generate a toxic level of drug.  
      c. Other Antineoplastic Agents  
      The anthracyclines, daunorubicin, and doxorubicin, are widely used antitumor agents that exert a number of biochemical effects that contribute to both therapeutic and toxic effects of the drugs. One of the primary mechanisms of the drugs is to intercalate DNA and to destroy gene replication in dividing cells. Doxorubicin is effective in acute leukemias and malignant lymphomas. It is very active in a number of solid tumors. Together with cyclophosphamide and cisplatin, doxorubicin has considerable activity against carcinoma of the ovary. It has been used effectively in the treatment of osteogenic sarcoma, metastatic adenocarcinoma of the breast, carcinoma of the bladder, neuroblastoma and metastatic thyroid carcinoma. The myocardial toxicity of doxorubicin limits the dose of this drug that a patient may receive.  
      Catalytic Proteins  
      a. Enzymes  
      The prior art discloses the use of non-mammalian enzymes conjugated to targeting antibodies in order to activate the prodrug selectively at tumor sites (e.g., carboxypeptidases described in Bagshawe, et al., Patent Application WO 88/078378; Penicillin-V amidase described in Kerr, et al.,  Cancer Immunol. Immunother.,  31 (1990):202-6; and β-lactamase described in Eaton, et al., Patent Application EP 90303681.2). Non-mammalian enzymes will generally be antigenic, and will thus be useful only for short term use or perhaps only a single use, due to the formation of neutralizing antibodies or the induction of undesirable immune responses.  
      In the cases where mammalian enzymes have been proposed e.g., alkaline phosphatase (Senter, et al., Patent Application EP 88112646), no provision has been made to obviate the problem of endogenous human enzymes activating the prodrug. Enzymes from different species of mammals will also present problems due to antigenicity. In addition, some proposed prodrug-activating enzymes, e.g., neuraminidase (Senter, et al., Patent Application EP 88/112646) could cause serious damage to the organism to which they are administered; neuramimidase removes the sialic acid residue at the terminus of oligosaccharides on glycoproteins (important components of erythrocyte membranes, for example), exposing galactose residues which mark such glycoproteins for rapid degradation in the liver. Due consideration of the situation in vivo is necessary for practical implementation of the strategy of targeted activation of prodrugs of antineoplastic agents in embodiments suitable for use in humans.  
      b. Catalytic Antibodies  
      The manner in which catalytic antibodies carry out chemical reactions on substrates (or antigens) is essentially governed by the same theoretical principles that describe how enzymes carry out chemical reactions. See U.S. Pat. No. 4,888,281, hereby incorporated by reference, which describes the catalysis of chemical reactions by antibodies. For most chemical transformations to occur, substantial activation energy is required to overcome the energy barrier that exists between reactant and product. Enzymes catalyze chemical reactions by lowering the activation energy required to form the short-lived unstable chemical species found at the top of the energy barrier, known as the transition state (Pauling, L.,  Am. Sci.  36 (1948):51; Jencks, W. P.,  Adv. Enzymol.  43 (1975):219). Four basic mechanisms are employed in enzymatic catalysis to stabilize the transition state, thereby reducing the free energy of activation. First, general acid and base residues are often found optimally positioned for participation in catalysis within catalytic active sites. A second mechanism involves the formation of covalent enzyme-substrate intermediates. Third, model systems have shown that binding reactants in the proper orientation for reaction can increase the “effective concentration” of reactants by at least seven orders of magnitude (Fersht, A. R., et al.,  Am. Chem. Soc.  90 (1968):5833) and therefore greatly reduce the entropy of a chemical reaction. Finally, enzymes can convert the energy obtained upon substrate binding to distort the reaction towards a structure resembling the transition state.  
      Drawing upon this understanding of enzymatic catalysis, several antibodies with catalytic activity have been induced by immunization and isolated (Powell, M. J., et al.,  Protein Engineering  3 (1989):69-75). One approach for inducing acid or base residues into the antigen binding site is to use a complementary charged molecule in the immunogen. This technique proved successful for elicitation of antibodies with a hapten containing a positively-charged ammonium ion (Shokat, et al.,  Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.  27 (1988):269-271). Several of these monoclonal antibodies catalyzed a beta-elimination reaction.  
      In another approach, antibodies are elicited to stable compounds that resemble the size, shape, and charge of the transition state of a desired reaction (i.e., transition state analogs). See U.S. Pat. No. 4,792,446 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,963,355 which describe the use of transition state analogues to immunize animals and the production of catalytic antibodies. Both of these patents are hereby incorporated by reference.  
      Examples of catalytic antibodies that are able to accelerate reactions by stabilizing the transition state structure and/or enhancing the “effective concentration” of reactants are discussed below.  
      1. Esterases  
      The mechanism of ester hydrolysis involves a charged transition state whose electrostatic and shape characteristics can be mimicked by a phosphonate structure. Immunization of a mouse with a nitrophenyl phosphonate ester hapten-protein conjugate led to the isolation of monoclonal antibodies with hydrolytic activity on methyl-p-nitrophenyl carbonate (Jacobs, et al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  109 (1987):2174-2176). An antibody against a similar transition state analog could hydrolyze its ester substrate in an organic matrix (Durfor, et al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  110 (1988):8713-8714). A substantial catalytic rate increase was reported for an antibody raised by immunization with a dipicolinic phosphonate ester (Tramontano, et al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  110 (1988):2282). The antibody hydrolyzed 4-acetamidophenyl esters with a kcat of 20 s −1 , which was 6 million times faster than the rate constant for uncatalyzed ester decomposition. A recent report on the stereospecific cleavage of alkyl esters containing D-phenylalanine versus L-phenylalanine by monoclonal antibodies raised against phosphonate esters adds further credence to the use of phosphonate esters to elicit catalytic esterase monoclonal antibodies (Pollack, et al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  111 (1989):5961-5962).  
      2. Peptidases/Amidases  
      Several ways of designing a transition state analog to mimic the transition state for a peptidase or amidase have been described. One report discussed the use of an aryl phosphonamidate transition state analog to produce an antibody that could cleave an aryl carboxamide (Janda, et al.,  Science  241 (1988):1188-1191). Another scheme for production of peptidases utilized a metal complex cofactor linked to a peptide (Iverson, et al.,  Science  243 (1989):1184-1188). Although the site of cleavage was not predicted by this method, further studies may allow for site-directed cleavage. Naturally occuring proteolytic antibodies have been found in humans (Paul, et al.,  Science  244 (1989):1158-1162). The antibodies were originally discovered in a subpopulation of asthma patients. One antiserum preparation cleaved a 28 amino acid polypeptide, vasoactive intestinal peptide (VIP) at one specific cleavage site.  
      3. Other Catalytic Antibodies  
      Other reactions which monoclonal antibodies have catalyzed are: a Claisen rearrangement (Jackson, et al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  110 (1988):4841-4842; Hilvert, et al.,  Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci . USA 85 (1988):4953-4955; Hilvert, et al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  110 (1988):5593-5594), redox reactions (Shokat, et al.,  Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.  27 (1989):269-271), photochemical cleavage of a thymine dimer (Cochran, et al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  110 (1988):7888-7890) stereospecific transesterification rearrangements (Napper, et al.,  Science  237 (1987):1041-1043) and a bimolecular amide synthesis (Benkovic, et al.,  Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA  85 (1988):5355-5358; Janda, et al.,  Science  241 (1988):1188-1191).  
     OBJECTS OF THE INVENTION  
      It is an object of the invention to provide novel prodrugs of cytotoxic chemotherapeutic agents.  
      It is an object of the invention to provide methods for localizing formation or delivery of cytotoxic chemotherapeutic agents to or near tumors.  
      It is an object of the invention to provide prodrugs with a high drug/prodrug cytotoxicity ratio, which are essentially stable to endogenous mammalian enzymes and which are activated by targeted catalytic proteins of the invention.  
      It is an object of the invention to provide methods for localizing formation or delivery of cytotoxic chemotherapeutic agents to or near tumors to overcome the problems of 1) toxicity toward normal tissues and 2) reduced antitumor efficacy due to utilization or inactivation of the drugs at non-tumor sites.  
      It is an object of the invention to provide methods for selective targeting of active alkylating species to tumor cells.  
      It is an object of the invention to reduce systemic drug toxicity through specific tumor site activation of prodrugs using tumor-specific antibody binding and prodrug activation.  
      It is an object of the invention to provide prodrugs that are stable to mammalian enzymes, ensuring minimal drug activation or degradation outside the targeted tumor cells.  
     SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION  
      These and other objects of the invention are achieved by prodrug compounds, and haptens which are used to produce antibodies capable of cleaving the protective groups from the prodrugs. In the prodrug compounds, a protective moiety lends stability to the compound, i.e., compounds of the invention are resistant to conversion to active drugs after administration, and substantially reduce the toxicity of the prodrug relative to the drug advantageously by at least one hundred fold.  
      The haptens of the invention are capable of producing catalytic antibodies by in vitro techniques followed by protein engineering of the antibodies found to be specific for the haptens, e.g., by random or site-directed mutagenesis, or by eliciting immune responses in mice or other hosts. The antibodies so-produced are capable of cleaving the protective moiety from the drug by esterase, amidase, hydrolase or glycosidase activity.  
      In the preferred embodiments of the invention, prodrug compounds are identified which meet the desired stability and toxicity characteristics and haptens are identified which have structural similarity to the same formula as the prodrug compounds and are capable of producing antibodies which catalytically cleave the drug from the residue of the compound.  
      One embodiment of the invention includes: 
          an immunoconjugate for treatment of specific cell populations comprising:     (a) a moiety capable of binding to an epitope of a specific cell population, and     (b) a catalytic antibody moiety capable of activating a prodrug.        

      Novel immunoconjugates include catalytic antibody moieties which activate novel prodrugs of the subject invention or prodrugs of the prior art.  
      The term moiety as used herein with reference to immunoconjugates means the whole antibody, enzyme or targeting protein, or active fragment thereof.  
      The invention also includes a therapeutic combination comprising: 
          (a) a novel prodrug of the subject invention, and     (b) an immunoconjugate comprising: 
            (i) a moiety capable of binding to an epitope of a specific cell population, and     (ii) a catalytic antibody moiety or enzyme moiety capable of activating said novel prodrug of the subject invention.    
               

      The invention also includes a therapeutic combination comprising: 
          (a) a prodrug of the prior art, and     (b) an immunoconjugate comprising: 
            (i) a moiety capable of binding to an epitope of a specific cell population, and     (ii) a catalytic antibody moiety capable of activating said prodrug of the prior art.    
               

      The invention also includes methods for treating various disease conditions by delivering a drug to a specific cell population such as a tumor. A targeting compound, e.g., an antibody, to which a catalytic antibody of the invention or fragment thereof is conjugated, is administered and permitted to become localized at the cell population. Thereafter, the prodrug is administered and is cleaved (i.e. activated) at the cell population to deliver the drug. Thus, included in the invention is a method of treating a condition of a specific cell population (e.g. cancer) comprising the steps of: 
          (a) administering an immunoconjugate comprising: 
            (i) a moiety capable of binding to an epitope of a specific cell population, and     (ii) a catalytic antibody moiety or enzyme moiety capable of activating a novel prodrug of the subject invention;    
            (b) permitting said immunoconjugate to become localized at said cell population; and     (c) administering a novel prodrug of the subject invention which is activated by said immunoconjugate.        

      Also included is a method of treating a condition of a specific cell population (e.g. cancer) comprising the steps of: 
          (a) administering an immunoconjugate comprising: 
            (i) a moiety capable of binding to an epitope of a specific cell population, and     (ii) a catalytic antibody moiety capable of activating a prodrug of the prior art;    
            (b) permitting said immunoconjugate to become localized at said cell population; and     (c) administering a prodrug of the prior art which is activated by said immunoconjugate.        

      A further embodiment of the invention is a method for identifying an antibody capable of activating a prodrug of interest comprising the steps of: 
      (i) immunizing a host with a hapten selected to elicit an antibody capable of activating the prodrug of interest and which is also capable of inactivating an antibiotic;     (ii) isolating recombinant genes coding for said antibody;     (iii) inserting the genes coding for said antibody into bacteria;     (iv) culturing said bacteria in a medium containing the antibiotic;     (v) selecting those bacteria which survive;     (vi) isolating antibody genes from the surviving bacteria;     (vii) expressing the antibody genes to produce sufficient quantity of antibody to characterize the antibody; and     (viii) screening the antibody for the capability of activating the prodrug of interest.    

      A further embodiment of the invention is a method for identifying an antibody capable of activating a prodrug of interest comprising the steps of 
      (i) immunizing a host with a hapten selected to elicit an antibody capable of activating the prodrug of interest;     (ii) isolating recombinant genes coding for said antibody;     (iii) inserting the genes coding for said antibody into bacteria;     (iv) culturing said bacteria in a medium containing thymidine derivatized by the same promoiety as the prodrug of interest;     (v) selecting those bacteria which survive;     (vi) isolating antibody genes from the surviving bacteria;     (vii) expressing the antibody genes to produce sufficient quantity of antibody to characterize the antibody; and     (viii) screening the antibody for the capability of activating the prodrug of interest.    

      A still further embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for antibodies capable of catalyzing the conversion of substrate to product comprising the steps of: 
      (i) raising antibodies against a hapten,     (ii) immobilizing said antibodies,     (iii) adding a substrate to said antibodies, and     (iv) identifying antibodies capable of catalyzing the conversion of substrate to product.    

      Optionally, after step (i) is the step of selecting antibodies which bind said hapten.  
      A further embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for cells expressing an antibody capable of catalyzing a reaction comprising the steps of: 
      (i) plating out cells auxotrophic for a compound and containing antibody genes, in a culture medium containing a proform of said compound; and     (ii) selecting those cells which survive which express an antibody capable of activating said proform to release said compound.    

      A further embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for cells expressing an antibody capable of activating a prodrug comprising the steps of: 
      (i) plating out thymidine dependent cells containing antibody genes in a culture medium containing a prodrug where said drug is thymidine; and     (ii) selecting those cells which survive which express an antibody capable of activating said prodrug to form thymidine.    

      A further embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for cells expressing an antibody capable of catalyzing a reaction comprising the steps of: 
      (i) plating out cells containing antibody genes in a culture medium containing a toxin; and     (ii) selecting those cells which survive which express an antibody capable of inactivating said toxin.    

      A still further embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for cells expressing an antibody capable of activating a prodrug comprising the steps of: 
      (i) plating out bacteria cells containing antibody genes in a culture medium containing an antibiotic; and     (ii) selecting those bacteria cells which survive which express an antibody capable of inactivating said antibiotic.    

      Another embodiment of the invention is a method of synthesizing a bispecific antibody comprising the steps of: 
      (i) expressing a gene having a sequence selected from the group consisting of: 
        VH antibody 1-S-VL antibody 1-S-VL antibody 2-S-VH antibody 2;     VH antibody 1-S-VL antibody 1-S-VH antibody 2-S-VL antibody 2;     VL antibody 1-S-VH antibody 1-S-VL antibody 2-S-VH antibody 2;     VL antibody 1-S-VH antibody 1-S-VH antibody 2-S-VL antibody 2;     wherein -S- is a linker sequence; and    
        (ii) isolating said bispecific antibody.    

      Antibody 1 is an antibody capable of binding to an epitope of a specific cell, and antibody 2 is a catalytic antibody or vice versa.  
      A further embodiment of the invention is a method of synthesizing a bispecific antibody comprising the steps of: 
      (i) expressing a gene having the sequence: 
        VL antibody 1-S-VH antibody 2, and    
        (ii) expressing a gene having the sequence: 
        VH antibody 1-S-VL antibody 2,    
        (iii) combining the products of steps (i) and (ii), and     (iv) isolating said bispecific antibody, 
 
 wherein -S- is a linker sequence. 
   

      A still further embodiment of the invention is a method of synthesizing a bispecific antibody comprising the steps of: 
      (i) expressing a gene having the sequence; 
        VL antibody 2-S-VH antibody 1, and    
        (ii) expressing a gene having the sequence: 
        VH antibody 2-S-VL antibody 1,    
        (iii) combining the products of steps (i) and (ii), and     (iv) isolating said bispecific antibody, 
 
 wherein -S- is a linker sequence.
   

    
    
     BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS  
       FIG. 1   a  shows the preparation of linear trimethylbenzoyl- and trimethoxybenzoyl-5-fluorouridine prodrugs, Compound 1a and 1b.  
       FIG. 1   b  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 1a, the linear phosphonate of trimethoxybenzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 4.  
       FIG. 1   c  shows the preparation of the prodrug, 5′-O-(2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, Compound 1c.  
       FIG. 1   d  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 1a: the linear phosphonate of trimethylbenzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 4a.  
       FIG. 2   a  shows the preparation of the prodrug intramolecular trimethoxybenzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 10.  
       FIG. 2   b  shows the preparation of the hapten of prodrug in Example 2a: the cyclic phosphonate of trimethoxybenzoate-S-fluorouridine, Compound 15.  
       FIG. 3  shows the preparation of experimental prodrug, galactosyl cytosine β-D-arabinofuranoside, Compound 19.  
       FIG. 4  shows the preparation of experimental prodrug, galactosyl 5-fluorouridine, Compound 24.  
       FIG. 5   a  shows the prepartation of the precursor to the hapten of the prodrugs in Examples 3 and 4, Compound 25.  
       FIG. 5   b  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrugs in Examples 3 and 4, Compounds 30a and 30b.  
       FIG. 5   c  shows the alternative preparation of the hapten of the prodrugs in Examples 3 and 4, Compounds 30a and 30b.  
       FIG. 6  shows the preparation of the experimental prodrug, aliphatic diethyl acetal protected aldophosphamide, Compound 38.  
       FIG. 7  shows the preparation of the guanyl hapten of the experimental prodrug, aliphatic diethyl acetal protected aldophosphamide, Compound 43.  
       FIG. 8   a  shows the preparation of the anhydride intermediate, Compound 45, for the synthesis of intramolecular enol trimethoxybenzoate phosphamide prodrug.  
       FIG. 8   b  shows the preparation of the Prodrug, intramolecular enol trimethoxybenzoate phosphamide, Compound 50.  
       FIG. 8   c  shows the preparation of the intramolecular enol trimethoxybenzoate phosphamide hapten, Compound 57.  
       FIG. 9  shows the comparison of AraC and galactosyl-AraC prodrug on Colo cells.  
       FIG. 10  shows the comparison of AraC and galactosyl-AraC prodrug on Lovo cells.  
       FIG. 11  shows the site specific activation of galactosyl-AraC prodrug on CEA antigen positive cells.  
       FIG. 12  shows the activity of galactosyl-AraC prodrug on CEA antigen negative cells.  
       FIG. 13  shows the white blood cell response to drug and prodrug.  
       FIG. 14  shows the segmented neutrophil response to drug and prodrug.  
       FIG. 15  shows the platelet response to drug and prodrug.  
       FIG. 16  shows the lymphocyte response to drug and prodrug.  
       FIG. 17  shows the red blood cell response to drug and prodrug.  
       FIG. 18  shows the comparison of 5′ fluorouridine and galactosyl-5′ fluorouridine prodrug on CEA antigen negative Colo cells.  
       FIG. 19  shows the site specific activation of 5′ fluorouridine prodrug on CEA antigen positive Lovo cells.  
       FIG. 20  shows the activity of 5′ fluorouridine prodrug on CEA antigen negative Colo cells.  
       FIG. 21  shows the comparison of 5′ fluorouridine and galactosyl-5′ fluorouridine prodrug on total leukocytes in mice.  
       FIG. 22  shows the comparison of 5′ fluorouridine and galactosyl-5′ fluorouridine prodrug on red blood cells in mice.  
       FIG. 23  shows the comparison of 5′ fluorouridine and galactosyl-5′ fluorouridine prodrug on total neutrophils in mice.  
       FIG. 24  shows the comparison of 5′ fluorouridine and galactosyl-5′ fluorouridine prodrug on total lymphocytes in mice.  
       FIG. 25  shows the comparison of 5′ fluorouridine and galactosyl-5′ fluorouridine prodrug on total bone marrow cellularity in mice.  
       FIG. 26  shows the preparation of the intermediate of the prodrugs in Examples 16 and 20 and of the haptens of the prodrugs in Examples 18 and 22, the (thiazolyl)iminoacetic ester, Compound 60.  
       FIG. 27  shows the preparation of the prodrug, the 5-fluorouridine substituted β-lactam, Compound 68.  
       FIG. 28  shows the preparation of the intermediate of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 16, the 5-alkynylated uridine, Compound 74.  
       FIG. 29  shows the preparation of the intermediate of the hapten of the β-lactam prodrug, Compound 79.  
       FIG. 30  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 16, the cyclobutanol substituted 5-fluorouridine, Compound 81.  
       FIG. 31  shows the preparation of the intermediate of the prodrug in Example 20, the 5-fluorouridine 5′-O-aryl ester, Compound 85.  
       FIG. 32  shows the preparation of the prodrug, the β-lactam substituted by a 5′-O-aroyl-5-fluorouridine, Compound 90.  
       FIG. 33  shows the preparation of the intermediate of the hapten in Example 22, the 5-alkynylated uridine 5′-O aryl ester, Compound 92.  
       FIG. 34  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 20, the cyclobutanol substituted by a 5′-O-aroyl uridine, Compound 100.  
       FIG. 35  shows the preparation of the adriamycin prodrug, aroylamide, Compound 103.  
       FIG. 36  shows the preparation of the hapten of the adriamycin prodrug, in Example 23, the phosphate of the aroylamide of adriamycin, Compound 104.  
       FIG. 37  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 23, the aroyl sulphonamides of adriamycin, Compound 106.  
       FIG. 38  shows the preparation of melphalan aroylamide prodrugs, Compound 109.  
       FIG. 39  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 25. The sulphonamide of the aroylamide of melphalan, Compound 110.  
       FIG. 40  shows the preparation of the prodrug, tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)aldophosphamide diethyl acetal, Compound 112.  
       FIG. 41  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 31: The trimethylammonium salt analog of tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)aldophosphamide diethyl acetal, Compound 119.  
       FIG. 42  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 31: The dipropylmethylammonium salt analog of tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)aldophosphamide diethyl acetal, Compound 121.  
       FIG. 43  shows the preparation of the prodrug, intramolecular bis(2-hydroxyethoxy)benzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 128.  
       FIG. 44  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 34: The cyclic phosphonate analog of bis(2-hydroxyethoxy)benzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 137.  
       FIG. 45  shows the preparation of the prodrug, intramolecular bis(3-hydroxypropyloxy)benzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 138.  
       FIG. 46  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 36: The cyclic phosphonate analog of bis(3-hydroxypropyloxy)benzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 139.  
       FIG. 47  shows the preparation of the prodrug: 5′-O-(2,4,6-trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, Compound 141.  
       FIG. 48   a  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 38: The pyridinium alcohol-substituted analog of uridine, Compound 149.  
       FIG. 48   b  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 38: The pyridinium alcohol-substituted analog of uridine, Compound 149.  
       FIG. 49  shows the preparation of the hapten of the prodrug in Example 38: The linear phosphonate of 5′-O-(2,4,6-trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, Compound 152.  
       FIG. 50  shows the preparation of the hapten for the prodrug in Example 1a: The linear phosphonate of 5′-O-(2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, Compound 155.  
    
    
      The invention, as well as other objects, features, and advantages thereof, will be understood more clearly and fully from the following detailed description when read with reference to the accompanying figures which illustrate the results of the experiments discussed in the examples below.  
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION  
      The invention provides specific methods for converting a variety of cancer chemotherapy drugs to substantially non-toxic prodrugs which are stable to endogenous enzymes, but which can be activated in or near tumors by prior administration of tumor-selective agents such as receptor-binding ligands, analogs which bind to tumor associated enzymes, and antibodies conjugated to or otherwise physically connected to a protein catalyst which converts the prodrugs to active cytotoxic agents. The catalytic protein is 1) a catalytic antibody, 2) an exogenous (or non-mammalian) enzyme, or 3) an endogenous (or mammalian) enzyme with low endogenous activity in the compartments to which the prodrug has access after administration. Such a system permits formation of relatively high concentrations of active agent localized at the tumor site(s) while also reducing systemic exposure to the drugs.  
      The invention provides prodrugs with a high drug/prodrug cytotoxicity ratio, which are essentially stable to endogenous mammalian enzymes and which are activated by targeted catalytic proteins of the invention.  
      The invention provides compounds and methods for preparing suitable prodrugs of antineoplastic nucleoside analogs that are substantially non-toxic in vivo until activated by a catalytic protein of the invention.  
      In designing prodrugs of cytotoxic agents for targeted activation, it is important that the prodrug substituents impart two properties to the drug: (1) that they are relatively stable after administration, and are therefore, relatively non-toxic; and (2) that they are specifically activatable. Furthermore, the prodrug substituents should not be toxic to the organism after cleavage by the catalytic protein.  
      In the invention, prodrugs of antineoplastic agents are made by attaching appropriate substituents, described below, to antineoplastic drugs. Substituents are chosen which render the parent drug relatively non-toxic and which are relatively resistant to removal by endogenous enzyme activity, but which are removed (yielding active drug) by the catalytic proteins of the invention.  
      Preferred substituents on the prodrug and on haptens for the prodrug are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkoxy, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium cyclicalkyl, substituted cyclicalkyl, or cyclicalkyl substituted with at least on heteroatom in the ring.  
      The substituents on the prodrug and on haptens for the prodrug comprising alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkoxy, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium, cyclicalkyl, substituted cyclicalkyl, and cyclicalkyl substituted with at least one heteroatom in the ring preferably have 1-10 carbon atoms in the carbon chain or ring.  
      Wherein the substituents on the prodrug and on haptens for the prodrug are substituted, the preferred substituents are —OH, alkyl, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, alkenyl, alkynyl, —CO—, —N 2 +, cyano, epoxide groups and heterocyclic groups.  
      Preferred heteroatoms in the prodrug and in haptens for the prodrug are phosphorus, sulfur, nitrogen, and oxygen. The substituents on the prodrug and on haptens for the prodrug which contain heteroatoms preferably contain one or more heteroatoms.  
      Preferred counterions (anions) for positively charged quaternary amines in the prodrug and in haptens for the prodrug are halogens, acetate, methane sulfonate, para-toluene sulfonate, and trifluoromethane sulfonate.  
      Catalytic proteins, and especially catalytic antibodies, most easily catalyze reactions with relatively low activation energies. Reactions that are known to be catalyzed or accelerated by antibodies include ester cleavage, Claisen rearrangement, redox reactions, stereospecific transesterification rearrangements, and amide or peptide cleavage.  
      Catalytic antibodies, as well as enzymes, catalyze chemical reactions by lowering the activation energy required to form the short-lived, unstable transition state. Catalytic antibodies which stabilize or enhance the formation of the transition state are produced by generating antibodies to stable analogs of the prodrugs that resemble the size, shape, and charge of the transition state of the substituent-cleavage reaction. For example, transition state analogs of ester-cleavage reactions (haptens) are prepared by substituting a stable phosphonate or sulfonate group for the normal carbonyl group.  
      The transition state analogs are typically used as haptens for eliciting antibodies with catalytic activity toward prodrugs of the invention. As such, their structure generally includes a linker arm for attachment to a protein carrier. Thus, the moiety of the hapten corresponding to the drug in the prodrug is typically an analog of the original drug, differing in the presence of a covalently-attached linker arm terminating in a group which can be attached to a protein. In some embodiments of the invention, the linker arm is attached to the moiety of the hapten corresponding to the prodrug substituent (e.g., the substituted benzoate portion of an ester prodrug of a nucleoside analog) of the prodrug.  
      In some transition state analogs, the drug-like moiety in the hapten is also optionally modified to provide structural similarity to the transition state for the prodrug-activation reaction. For example, in drugs bearing a hydroxyl group through which the drug is attached to its prodrug moiety, the oxygen of attachment (which is normally part of the drug molecule) is replaced by —NH—, —CH 2 —, or —S— in the corresponding hapten.  
      Furthermore, the drug-like moiety in the hapten is also optionally modified to give it structural rigidity in a conformation favorable for eliciting antibodies with catalytic activity toward the corresponding prodrug. In most cases, however, the moiety of the transition-state analog corresponding to the drug portion of the prodrug has a substantial structural similarity to the original drug. Examples of haptens made from analogs of the drug moieties of their corresponding prodrugs are shown below.  
      A preferred drug-like moiety in the hapten is an analog of 5-fluorouridine which is substituted in the 5-position by a moiety comprising —C≡C—(CH 2 ) n NHCBz or (CH 2 ) n NH 2 , where n is an integer between 1 and 10, and CBz is carbobenzyloxy.  
      Another preferred drug-like moiety in the hapten is an analog of phosphoramide mustard [R′OP(O)(R″)N(CH 2 CH 2 CL) 2 ]), wherein R′ and R″ are the same or different and independently from one another are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkoxy, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium, cyclicalkyl, substituted cyclicalkyl, or cyclicalkyl substituted with at least one heteroatom in the ring. A preferred embodiment is a drug-like moiety in the hapten wherein R′ is alkylammonium salt; and where R″ is a substituted cyclicalkyl wherein the cyclicalkyl is substituted with two heteroatoms in the ring.  
      Substantial esterase activity is present and ubiquitous in mammalian tissues. This activity is relatively nonspecific, cleaving ester bonds in a large variety of compounds. However, some classes of prodrugs of the invention, e.g., substituted aromatic esters of nucleoside analogs, have ester substituents which are relatively resistant to endogenous mammalian esterase activity.  
      Similar substituted aromatic esters and other prodrug substituents of the invention are useful for preparing prodrugs of a variety of classes of antineoplastic agents with appropriate functional groups, including but not limited to nucleoside analogs and other antimetabolites, alkylating agents such as cyclophosphamide derivatives, intercalating agents such as doxorubicin or etoposide, spindle poisons such as vinca alkaloids, or other classes of cytotoxic drugs.  
      The prodrugs of the invention, which are relatively resistant to activation by endogenous mammalian enzymes, are activated by the catalytic proteins of the invention, e.g., catalytic antibodies (or active fragments thereof) prepared by raising antibodies to analogs of the transition states of the prodrug activation reactions.  
      The catalytic proteins of the invention are conjugated to, or otherwise physically associated with, a tumor-selective antibody, antibody fragment, or binding protein or analogs to tumor-associated proteins or tumor-selective receptor ligands. This complex is typically administered prior to the prodrug, so that it is localized in or near cancer cells. The prodrug is then administered and cleaved by the catalytic protein, forming active antineoplastic drugs in or near tumors.  
      Below are described various prodrugs of the invention as well as transition state analogs corresponding to such prodrugs. Additionally described are the haptens which can be used to produce antibodies capable of cleaving the protective groups from the prodrugs.  
      Novel Prodrugs and Haptens of the Invention  
      Classes of Prodrug Substituents and Prodrug Activation Reactions  
      Within the broad category of catalytic antibody-mediated hydrolysis reactions, there are several classes of specific catalytic antibody-mediated catalytic reactions which are most suitable for use with appropriate prodrugs in order to effect their activation. Catalytic antibodies with the following types of activity are prepared and utilized: 
      A. Esterase—cleaves acyl substituents esterified to drugs     B. Amidase—cleaves acyl substituents attached to amino groups     C. Acetal hydrolase—hydrolyzes acetals (or ortho esters) to aldehydes (or acids)     D. Glycosidase—cleaves sugar substituents attached to drugs via a glycoside linkage.    

      Catalytic antibodies with these classes of activity are typically elicited by immunization of animals with haptens that mimic the transition state of the prodrug activation reactions. Prodrug substituents which are relatively stable to mammalian enzymatic activity are designed and utilized in creating transition state analogs which are in turn utilized to produce catalytic antibodies capable of activating the prodrugs. In cases where enzymes capable of activating prodrugs of the invention exist, they are optionally used for this purpose as an alternative to catalytic antibodies.  
      The prodrugs themselves are also optionally used to elicit antibodies with catalytic activity. Conversely, transition state analogs of prodrugs are also optionally useful as prodrugs or drugs. Typically, however, the compounds designated as prodrugs are utilized as such, and the compounds designated below as transition state analogs are utilized as haptens for eliciting catalytic antibodies.  
      Prodrug substituents which are relatively stable to mammalian enzymatic activity and which are activated by the antibody-catalyzed reactions listed above include the following:  
      A. Prodrug Activation by Esterase Reaction  
      Steric hindrance from the substituents on the benzoate or acetate moieties inhibits their cleavage by endogenous esterase activity (see Example 27). Examples of these are as follows: 
      1. Substituted aromatic esters, e.g., substituted benzoate esters;     2. Substituted aromatic esters activated by an intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the ester carbonyl;     3. Di- or tri-substituted acetate esters; and     4. Di- or tri-substituted acetate esters activated by an intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the ester carbonyl.    

      Other ester substituents which are stable to mammalian enzyme activity and which are cleaved by catalytic antibodies are within the scope of the invention.  
      Transition state analogs for ester hydrolysis reactions typically have a phosphonate or sulfonate group in the place of the original carbonyl group, as described in more detail below.  
      B. Prodrug Activation by Amidase Reaction  
      Amides in general, and those listed below in particular, are relatively stable to mammalian enzyme activity. 
      1. Aromatic or substituted aromatic amides, e.g., benzoate or substituted benzoate amides;     2. Aromatic or substituted aromatic amides activated by an intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the amide carbonyl;     3. Formylamides;     4. Acetylamides;     5. Acetylamides activated by an intramolecular nucleophilic attack on the amide carbonyl; and     6. Monolactam hydrolysis.    

      Transition state analogs for amide hydrolysis reactions typically have a phosphonate or sulfonate group in the place of the original carbonyl group, as described in more detail below.  
      C. Prodrug Activation by Acetal Hydrolysis Reaction  
      Acetal prodrugs of antineoplastic agents are stable and relatively non-toxic (see Example 29). Examples of these are as follows: 
      1. Dialkyl acetals;     2. Ortho esters;     3. Diol acetals, e.g., sugar-substituted acetals; and     4. Diol ortho esters.    

      Transition state analogs for acetal hydrolysis reactions typically have an amidine or guanidine group replacing the acetal group in the original prodrug.  
      D. Prodrug Activation By Glycosidase Reaction  
      Glycosyl derivatives of the invention are stable and relatively non-toxic (see Example 28). Examples of these are as follows: 
      1. Hexopyranose conjugated to drug hydroxyl group via the anomeric position of the sugar.     2. Hexofuranose conjugated to drug hydroxyl group via the anomeric position of the sugar.    

      Transition state analogs for glycosidase reactions typically have amino groups replacing the anomeric and ring oxygen atoms of the sugar.  
      The antineoplastic agents utilized and derivatized in the invention contain hydroxyl groups or primary amino groups; the antineoplastic drugs are therefore represented in the compound descriptions below as XQH where Q is —O— or —NH—. X, as utilized in the compound description is the dehydroxy or deamino radical of the original drug. The moieties corresponding to the drug radical X in the transition state analogs are represented as X′. As described above, X′ is typically an analog of the drug X, although X′ may also be identical to the drug radical X. A preferred feature of X′ is that it must bear sufficient structural similarity to the drug radical X so that the transition-state analog is capable of eliciting antibodies with catalytic activity toward the prodrug of XQH. Since the preferred site for catalysis is actually within the prodrug substituent, or at the juncture between substituent and drug, there is latitude in the structure of X′. Typically, however, X′ will be very similar to X, generally differing in that X′ contains a linker arm for joining the transition-state analog to a carrier protein such as bovine serum albumin (BSA) or keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH) for immunizing animals to elicit antibodies to the transition-state analog which have catalytic activity.  
      Esterase Catalysis  
      Novel compounds in accordance with the invention which are activated by esterase catalysis include compounds of the formulas set forth below:  
      A. Prodrug Activation by Esterase Reaction  
      1. Substituted Aromatic Esters, e.g., Substituted Benzoate Esters  
      Substituted Aromatic Ester Prodrug  
      Included in the invention is a substituted aromatic ester compound Ala having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XOH. XOH is advantageously a cytotoxic drug such as an antineoplastic nucleoside analog (joined to the carboxyl moiety at the 3′ and/or 5′ position of the aldose ring), doxorubicin, or the enol form of aldophosphamide.        

      R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4  and R 5  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium, with the proviso that at least one of R 1-5  are not H, and advantageously, R 1  or R 5  is not H.  
      The compound is not Ara-C-2,4,6-trimethyl benzoate, Ara-C-3,4,5-trimethoxy benzoate or Ara-C-2,6-dimethyl benzoate. However, Ara-C-2,4,6-trimethyl benzoate, Ara-C-3,4,5-trimethoxy benzoate or Ara-C-2,6-dimethyl benzoate are useful in the methods of treatment utilizing catalytic antibodies of the subject invention.  
      Hapten 1  
      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound A1b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound Ala, and X′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     D is P(O)OH, SO 2 , CHOH or SO (with any stereochemistry), if D is CHOH then B is CH 2 , and     R 1′ , R 2′ , R 3′ , R 4′  and R 5′  are the same or different, are optionally linked to a carrier protein and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium, with the proviso that at least one of R 1′-5′  are not H. Advantageously, R 1′  or R 5′  is not H. 
 
 Hapten 2 
       

      Included in this invention is a substituted aromtic compound A1a′ having the formula: 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XOH. XOH is advantageously a cytotoxin drug such as an antinucleoplastic nucleoside analog (joined ato B at the 3′ and/or 5′ position of the aldose ring), doxorubicin, or the enol form of aldeophosphamide:     Z is C or N;     B is O, S, NH or CH 2 ;     D is HOP(O), SO 2 , CHOH or SO (with any stereochemistry);     R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4  and R 5  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkoxy, haloalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkyl-amino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium, with the proviso that at least one of R 1-5  are not H, and advantageously, R 1  or R 5  is not H. 
 
 2. Substituted Aromatic Esters Activated by an Intramolecular Nucleophilic Attack on the Ester Carbonyl 
 
 Substituted Aromatic Ester Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a substituted aromatic ester compound A2a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as an antineoplastic nucleoside analog (joined to the carboxyl moiety at the 3′ and/or 5′ position of the aldose ring), doxorubicin, or the enol form of aldophosphamide.     R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , and R 9  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium. Advantageously, at least 1 of R 6-9  is not H.     J is alkyl with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration, alkyl with heteroatoms with one or more 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration which have substituents that are phenyl, alkyl, or alkyl with heteroatoms.     Y is OH, NH 2 , NHR or SH where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of —OH, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, —CO—, cyano, epoxide groups and heteroatoms. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound A2b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound A2a, and X′ is optionally linked to carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     D′ is P(O), COH (with any stereochemistry), if D′ is COH then B and Y′ are CH 2 ,     Y′ is O, NH, NR, S or CH 2  where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of —OH, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, —CO—, cyano, epoxide groups and heteroatoms,     R 6′ , R 7′ , R 8′ , and R 9′  are the same or different, are optionally linked to the carrier protein and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium. Advantageously, at least 1 of R 6′-9′  is not H.     J is alkyl with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration, alkyl with one or more heteroatoms with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration which have substituents that are phenyl, alkyl, or alkyl with one or more heteroatoms. 
 
 3. Di- or Tri-Substituted Acetate Esters 
 
 Di- or Tri-Substituted Acetate Ester Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a di or tri-substituted acetate ester compound A3a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as an antineoplastic nucleoside analog (joined to the carboxyl moiety at the 3′ and/or 5′ position of the aldose ring), doxorubicin, or the enol form of aldophosphamide.     R 10 , R 11  and R 12  are the same or different but at least two of them are not H, and are H or alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with one or more heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene.        

      The compound is not Ara-C-diethyl acetate. However, Ara-C-diethyl acetate is useful in the methods of treatment utilizing catalytic antibodies of the subject invention.  
      Hapten  
      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound A3b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of A3a, and X′ is optionally linked to carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     D is P(O)OH, SO 2 , CHOH or SO with any stereochemistry, if D is CHOH then B is CH 2 , and     R 10′-12′  which are optionally linked to the carrier protein, are the same or different but at least two of them are not H, and are H or alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with one or more heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene. 
 
 4. Di- or Tri-Substituted Acetate Esters Activated by an Intramolecular Nucleophilic Attack on the Ester Carbonyl. 
 
 Di- or Tri-Substituted Acetate Ester Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a substituted acetate ester compound A4a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as an antineoplastic nucleoside analog, doxorubicin, or the enol form of aldophosphamide.     J is alkyl with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration, alkyl with one or more heteroatoms with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration which have substituents that are phenyl, alkyl, or alkyl with one or more heteroatoms,     Y is OH, NH 2 , NHR or SH, where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of —OH, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, —CO—, cyano, epoxide groups and one or more heteroatoms, and     R 13-14  are the same or different but are not both H, and are H or alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with one or more heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound A4b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of compound A4a. and X′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     D′ is P(O), COH with any stereochemistry, if D′ is COH, then B and Y′ are CH 2 ,     Y′ is O, NH, NR, S or CH 2  where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally subsituted by one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of —OH, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, —CO—, cyano, epoxide groups and one or more heteroatoms,     J is alkyl with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration, alkyl with one or more heteroatoms with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration which have substituents that are phenyl, alkyl, or alkyl with heteroatoms, and     R 13′-14′  which are optionally linked to a carrier protein are the same or different but at least two of them are not H, and are H or alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene. 
 
 Amidase Catalysis 
       

      Novel compounds in accordance with the invention which are activated by amidase-like catalysis include compounds of the following formulas:  
      B. Prodrug Activation BY Amidase Reaction  
      1. Aromatic or Substituted Aromatic Amides, e.g., Benzoate or Substituted Benzoate Amides  
      Aromatic or Substituted Aromatic Amide Prodrug  
      Included in the invention is an aromatic amide B1a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XNH 2 . Advantageously, XNH 2  is a cytotoxic drug, such as doxorubicin or melphalan.     R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 18  and R 19  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound B1b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound B1a, and X′ is optionally linked to the carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     D is P(O)OH, SO 2 , CHOH or SO with any stereochemistry, if D is CHOH then B is CH 2 , and     R 15′ , R 16′ , R 17′ , R 18′  and R 19′  are the same or different, are optionally linked to the carrier protein, and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium. 
 
 2. Aromatic or Substituted Aromatic Amides Activated by an Intramolecular Nucleophilic Attack on the Amide Carbonyl 
 
 Aromatic or Substituted Aromatic Amide Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is an aromatic amide compound B2a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XNH 2 . Advantageously, XNH 2  is a cytotoxic drug such as doxorubicin or melphalan.     J is alkyl with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration, alkyl with heteroatoms with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration which have substituents that are phenyl, alkyl, or alkyl with heteroatoms,     Y is OH, NH 2 , NHR or SH where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of —OH, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, —CO—, cyano, epoxide groups and heteroatoms, and     R 20 , R 21 , R 22 , and R 23  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound B2b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of the drug XNH 2  of compound B2a, and X′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     D′ is P(O), COH with any stereochemistry, if D′ is COH then B and Y′ are CH 2 ,     Y′ is O, NH, NR, S or CH 2  where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of —OH, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, —CO—, cyano, epoxide groups and heteroatoms,     J is alkyl with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration, alkyl with heteroatoms with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration which have substituents that are phenyl, alkyl, or alkyl with heteroatoms, and;     R 20′ , R 21′ , R 22′ , and R 23′  are the same or different, are optionally linked to the carrier protein and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium. 
 
 3. Formylamides 
 
 Formylamide Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a formylamide compound B3a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XNH 2 . Advantageously, XNH 2  is a cytotoxic drug such as doxorubicin or melphalan. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound B3b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound B3a, and X′ is optionally linked to the carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 , and     D″ is HP(O)OH, CH 2 OH, P(O)(OH) 2 , or SO 3 H, if D″ is CH 2 OH then B is CH 2 . 
 
 4. Acetylamides 
 
 Acetylamide Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is an acetylamide compound B4a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XNH 2 . Advantageously, XNH 2  is a cytotoxic drug such as doxorubicin or melphalan.     R 24 , R 25  and R 26  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound B4b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound B4a, and X′ is optionally linked to the carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     D is P(O)OH, SO 2 , CHOH or SO with any stereochemistry, if D is CHOH then B is CH 2 , and     R 24′-26′  which are optionally linked to a carrier protein, are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene. 
 
 5. Acetylamides Activated by an Intramolecular Nucleophilic Attack on the Amide Carbonyl 
 
 Acetylamide Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is an acetylamide compound B5a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XNH 2 . Advantageously, XNH 2  is a cytotoxic drug such as doxorubicin or melphalan.     J is alkyl with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration, alkyl with heteroatoms with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration which have substituents that are phenyl, alkyl, or alkyl with heteroatoms,     Y is OH, NH 2 , NHR or SH where R is an alkyl. alkenyl or alkynyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of —OH, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, —CO—, cyano, epoxide groups and heteroatoms, and     R 27-28  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound B5b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound B5a, and X′ is optionally linked to the carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     D′ is P(O), COH with any stereochemistry, if D′ is COH then B and Y′ are CH 2 .     Y′ is O, NH, NR, S or CH 2  where R is an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of —OH, chloro, fluoro, bromo, iodo, —SO 3 , aryl, —SH, —(CO)H, —(CO)OH, ester groups, ether groups, —CO—, cyano, epoxide groups and heteroatoms,     J is alkyl with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration, alkyl with heteroatoms with 1-9 atoms in a linear configuration which have substituents that are phenyl, alkyl, or alkyl with heteroatoms, and     R 27′-28′  which are optionally linked to the carrier protein are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene. 
 
 6. Monobactam Hydrolysis. 
 
 Overview of Hapten Strategies for Raising β-Lactamase Antibodies 
       

      It is necessary to design strategies and prepare haptens for immunization to elicit antibodies capable of monocyclic β-lactam (“monobactam”) hydrolysis. Some possibilities of design are shown below.  
                 
 
      The strategy of Compound 1 which differs from the β-lactam substrate in that the β-lactam ring has been replaced with cyclobutanol (such that a secondary alcohol replaces the β-lactam carbonyl). Alcohol transition state analogs have been successfully designed and are well known as transition state inhibitors in enzymology (Bolis, G., et al.,  J. Med. Chem.  30(1987):1729-37) and have been used to raise hydrolytic catalytic antibodies (Shokat, K. M., et al.,  Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.  29 (1990):1296-1303).  
      The strategy of Compound 2 involves the addition of a methylene group to the β-lactam ring to form a γ-lactam ring. Because of the difference in ring size (four- versus five-membered), the bond angle of the carbonyls will differ with respect to their respective rings. The carbonyl of the γ-lactam will be more out of plane of the ring (more tetrahedral) than the β-lactam carbonyl (Baldwin, J. E., et al.,  Tetrahedron  42 (1986):4879). This difference will cause substrate destabilization of the β-lactam to a γ-lactam-elicited antibody, contributing to catalysis.  
      Non-cyclic hapten 3 utilizes a combination of substrate destabilization and transition state complementarity to induce an antibody with β-lactamase activity. This or similar compounds will be linear analogs of the β-lactam in which the scissile bond has been replaced by the transition state-like dialkylphosphinate (shown here), or similar phosphorous-based group. Thus in this strategy, there is a combination of transition state analogy and ground state destabilization.  
      In all strategies, the structure of the substituents will depend on the drug (occupying R″) conjugation to an immunogenic carrier protein including but not limited to KLH or BSA (through R, R′, or R″) and the structure of the antibiotic (R and R″) used in screening mutants.  
      Monolactam Prodrug  
      Included in the invention is a monolactam compound B6a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein at least one of R 30  and R 31  is OX where X is a radical of the drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as an antineoplastic nucleoside analog (joined to the β-lactam moiety at the 3′ and/or 5′ oxygen of the aldose ring), doxorubicin, or the enol form of aldophosphamide.     R 29-33  which are not OX are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkenyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, carboxyalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms and with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms, aminoalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, acyloxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), or acylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), and     R 29  is optionally SO 3 H or SO 4 H. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound B6b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein at least one of R 30′  and R 31′  is an analog of X of compound B6a, and said analog is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     D′″ is SO 2 , SO or CHOH with any stereochemistry, if D′″ is CHOH then Z′ is CH,     Z′ is O, N, or CH with any stereochemistry; when Z′ is O then R 29′  is omitted,     R 29′-33′  which are not said analog, are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkenyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, carboxyalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms and with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms, aminoalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, acyloxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), or acylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), and     R 29′  is optionally SO 3 H or SO 4 H, and     R 29′-33′  are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Monolactam Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a monolactam compound B6c having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of a drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as an antineoplastic nucleoside analog (joined to the carboxyl moiety at the 3′ and/or 5′ position of the aldose ring), doxorubicin or the enol form of aldophosphamide.        

      R 34 , R 35 , R 36 , and R 37  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium, 
          n is an integer from 0 to 3,     E is optionally present and is oxygen, carbonyloxy, or oxycarbonyl,     A is the radical:  
                 
    and R 38 , R 39 , R 40 , R 41  or R 42  is the site of attachment to E, or if E is not present to [CH 2 ] n  or if E is not present and n=o, to the phenyl ring.     R 38 , R 39 , R 40 , R 41  and R 42  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkenyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, carboxyalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms and with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms, aminoalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, acyloxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), or acylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), and     R 38  is optionally SO 3 H or SO 4 H. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound B6d having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound B6c, and is optionally linked to carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     R 34′ , R 35′ , R 36′ , and R 37′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, alkene with 1-10 carbon atoms, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, thioalkyl, amino, alkylamino, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, or alkylammonium, with the proviso that at least 1 of R 34′-37′  is not H,     R 34′ , R 35′ , R 36′  or R 37′  is optionally the site of attachment to a carrier protein,     n is an integer from 0 to 3,     E′ is optionally present and is CH 2 , O, carbonyloxy, carbonyl methylene, oxycarbonyl, or methylenecarbonyl,     A′ is the radical:  
                 
    wherein D′″ is SO 2 , SO or CHOH with any stereochemistry, if D′″ is CHOH, Z′ is CH,     Z′ is O, N, or CH with any stereochemistry; when Z′ is O then R 38′  is omitted,     and R 38′ , R 39′ , R 40′ , R 41′  or R 42′  is the site of attachment to E′, or if E′ is not present to (CH 2 ) n , or if E is not present and n=o, to the phenyl ring.     R 38′  R 39′ , R 40′ , R 41′  and R 42′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkenyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, carboxyalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms and with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms, aminoalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, acyloxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), or acylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), and     R 38′  is optionally SO 3 H or SO 4 H. 
 
 Monolactam Di or Tri-Substituted Acetate Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a monolactam compound B6e having the formula:  
                 
          X is a radical of the drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as an antineoplastic nucleoside analog (joined to the carboxyl moiety at the 3′ and/or 5′ position of the aldose ring), doxorubicin, or the enol form of aldophosphamide.     n is an integer from 0 to 4,     R 43  and R 44  are the same or different but both are not H, and are alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene,     E is optionally present and is oxygen, carbonyloxy, or oxycarbonyl,     A is the following radical:  
                 
    wherein R 38 , R 39 , R 40 , R 41  or R 42  is the site of attachment to E, or if E is not present to (CH 2 ) n , or if E is not present and n=o, t the carbon atom to which R 43  and R 44  are attached.     R 38 , R 39 , R 40 , R 41  and R 42  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkenyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, carboxyalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms and with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms, aminoalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, acyloxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), or acylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), and     R 38  is optionally SO 3 H or SO 4 H. 
 
 Hapten 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound B6f having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound B6e, and X′ is optionally linked to carrier protein,     B is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     n is an interger from 0 to 4,     R 43′  and R 44′  are the same or different but both are not H, and are alkyl with 2 to 22 carbon atoms, alkyl with heteroatoms, cycloalkyldiol, monocyclic aromatic, alkylphosphonate, alkylsulfonate, alkylcarboxylate, alkylammonium or alkene,     E′ is optionally present and is CH 2 , O, carbonyloxy, carbonyl methylene, oxycarbonyl, or methylenecarbonyl,     A′ is the radical:  
                 
    wherein D is SO 2 , SO or CHOH with any stereochemistry, if D′″ is CHOH, Z′ is CH,     Z′ is O, N, or CH with any stereochemistry, when Z′ is O then R 38′  is omitted,     R 38′ , R 39′ , R 40 , R 41′  or R 42  is the site of attachment to to E′, or if E′ is not present to (CH 2 ) n , or if E′ is not present and n=o, to the carbon atom to which R 34  and R 44′  are attached,     R 38′ , R 39′ , R 40′ , R 41′  and R 42′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkenyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, monocyclic aromatic, carboxyalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms and with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), alkoxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, alkylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms, aminoalkyl with 1-10 carbon atoms, acyloxy with 1-10 carbon atoms, with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), or acylamino with 1-10 carbon atoms with or without heterocyclic or phenyl substitution (optionally substituted on the heterocyclic or phenyl group), and     R 38  is optionally SO 3 H or SO 4 H. 
 
 Acetal Hydrolase Catalysis 
       

      Novel compounds in accordance with the invention which are activated by acetal hydrolase or ortho-ester hydrolase catalysis include compounds of the following formulas:  
      C. Prodrug Activation By Acetal Hydrolysis Reaction  
      1. Dialkyl Acetals  
      Dialkyl Acetal Prodrug  
      Included in the invention is an alkyl acetal compound C1a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XQH. Advantageously XQH is a cytotoxic drug such as a nucleoside analog or phosphoramide mustard [HOP(O)(NH 2 )N(CH 2 CH 2 Cl) 2 ], melphalan or doxorubicin.     where Q is O or NH, and     R 45  and R 46  are the same or different and are alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic.        

      The compound is not Aldophosphamide diethylacetal. However, Aldophosphamide diethylacetal is useful in the methods of treatment utilizing catalytic antibodies of the subject invention.  
      Hapten 1  
      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C1b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein Q′ is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     X′ is an analog of X of compound C1a, and X′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     B′ is NH or CH 2 , if B′ is NH, then Q′ is CH 2 , and     R 45′  and R 46′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 2 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C1c having the formula:  
                 
          wherein R 45′  and R 46′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 3 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C1d having the formula:  
                 
          wherein Q′ is O, S, NH, or CH 2 ,     wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound C1a, and X′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein, and     R 45′  and R 46′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 4 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C1e having the formula:  
                 
          wherein R 45′  and R 46′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 5 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C1F having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound C1a;     wherein E and E′ are the same or different and are N, C, O or S.     wherein R 45″  is H, aminocarboxy, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein.     When E which is linked to R 45″ , is N, it is preferred that the E-R 45″ , linkage forms an amide substituted with an amine moiety. 
 
 2. Ortho Esters 
 
 Ortho Ester Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is an orthoester compound C2a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as a nucleoside analog or doxorubicin or the enol form of aldophosphamide.     R 47 , R 48 , and R 49  are the same or different and are alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and     R 49  is optionally H. 
 
 Hapten 1 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C2b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound C2a, and which is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     Q′ is O, CH 2 , S, or NH, and     R 47′  and R 48′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 2 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C2c having the formula:  
                 
          wherein R 47′ , R 48′ , and R 49′  are the same or different and are H, allyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 3 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C2d having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound C2a, and which is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     Q′ is CH 2 , and     R 47′  and R 48′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 4 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C2e having the formula:  
                 
          wherein R 47′  and R 48′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 3. Diol Acetals, e.g., Sugar-Substituted Acetals 
 
 Diol Acetal Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a diol acetal compound C3a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XQH. Advantageously, XQH is a cytotoxic drug such as a nucleoside analog or phosphoramide mustard [HOP(O)(NH 2 )N(CH 2 CH 2 Cl) 2 ], melphalan or doxorubicin.     Q is O or NH, and     R 50  and R 51  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic. Advantageously, R 50  and R 51  are cis and the same so that there is a mirror plane of symmetry within the acetal moiety of the molecule, and the number of isomers is minimized. 
 
 Hapten 1 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C3b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein R 50′  and R 51′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 2 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C3c having the formula:  
                 
          wherein Q′ is O, S, NH or CH 2 ,     X′ is an analog of X of compound C3a, and X′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     B′ is NH or CH 2 , if B′ is NH, then Q′ is CH 2 , and     R 50′  and R 51′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 3 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C3d having the formula:  
                 
          wherein Q′ is O, S, NH or CH 2 ,     X′ is an analog of X of compound C3a, and X′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein, and     R 50′  and R 51′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Hapten 4 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C3e having the formula:  
                 
          wherein R 50′  and R 51′  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Sugar Acetal Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a diol acetal compound C3f having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of a drug XQH. Advantageously, XQH is a cytotoxic drug such as a nucleoside analog or phosphoramide mustard [HOP(O)(NH 2 )N(CH 2 CH 2 Cl) 2 ], melphalan or doxorubicin.     Q is O or NH, and     G is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or ortho-phenyldiol, and G is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Sugar Acetal Hapten 1 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C3g having the formula:  
                 
          wherein Q′ is O, S, NH or CH 2 ,     X′ is an analog of X of compound C3f, and X′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     B′ is NH or CH 2 , if B′ is NH, then Q′ is CH 2 , and     G′ is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or ortho-phenyldiol, and G′ is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and is optionally linked to a carrier protein.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Sugar Acetal Hapten 2 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C3h having the formula:  
                 
          G′ is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or ortho-phenyldiol, and G′ is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and is optionally linked to a carrier protein.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine or analogues thereof     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Sugar Acetal Hapten 3 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C3i having the formula:  
                 
          wherein Q′ is O, S, NH or CH 2 ,     X′ is an analog of X of compound C3f, which is optionally linked to a carrier protein, and     G′ is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or ortho-phenyldiol, and G′ is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine or analogues thereof     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Sugar Acetal Hapten 4 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C3j having the formula:  
                 
          G′ is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or ortho-phenyldiol, and G′ is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine or analogues thereof     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 4. Diol Ortho Esters 
       

      Diol orthoester prodrug Included in the invention is a diol orthoester compound C4a having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of a drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as a nucleoside analog or doxorubicin or the enol form of aldophosphamide.        

      R 52 , R 53  and R 54  are the same or different and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic. Advantageously, R 52  and R 53  are cis and the same so that there is a mirror plane of symmetry within the cyclic acetal moiety of the molecule, and the number of isomers is minimized.  
      Diol Orthoester Hapten 1  
      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C4b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein R 52′ , R 53′ , and R 54′  are the same or different, and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Diol Orthoester Hapten 2 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C4c having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound C4a, and which is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     Q′ is CH 2  or NH, and     R 52′  and R 53′  are the same or different, and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Diol Orthoester Hapten 3 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C4d having the formula:  
                 
          wherein R 52′ , R 53′ , and R 54′  are the same or different, and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Diol Orthoester Hapten 4 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C4e having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound C4a, and which is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     Q′ is CH 2 , and     R 52′  and R 53′  are the same or different, and are H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and are optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Sugar Orthoester Prodrug 
       

      Included in the invention is a diol orthoester compound C4f having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X is a radical of a drug XOH. Advantageously, XOH is a cytotoxic drug such as a nucleoside analog, the enol form of aldophosphamide or doxorubicin.     G is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or orthophenyldiol, and G is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and     R 59  is H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine or analogues thereof     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Sugar Orthoester Hapten 1 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C4g having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound C4f, and which is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     Q′ is CH 2  or NH, and     G′ is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or orthophenyldiol, and G′ is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and is optionally linked to a carrier protein.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine or analogues thereof     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Sugar Orthoester Hapten 2 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C4h having the formula:  
                 
          G′ is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or orthophenyldiol, and G′ is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and is optionally linked to a carrier protein, and     R 59′  is H, alkyl unsubstituted, alkyl substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate or alkyl ester or alkyl amide, hydroxyl, alkylammonium, amino, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and is optionally linked to a carrier protein.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine or analogues thereof     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Sugar Orthoester Hapten 3 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C4i having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound C4f, and which is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     Q′ is CH 2 , and     G′ is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or orthophenyldiol, and G′ is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and is optionally linked to a carrier protein.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine or analogues thereof     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Sugar Orthoester Hapten 4 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound C4 having the formula:  
                 
          G′ is a radical of the diol G(OH) 2 , G(OH) 2  is a sugar, cycloalkyldiol or orthophenyldiol, and G′ is optionally substituted with halogens, heteroatoms, phosphonate, sulfonate, carboxylate, alkylammonium, alkene, or monocyclic aromatic, and is optionally linked to a carrier protein.        

      Examples of the above are as follows:  
                 
          Base=Uracil, 5-Fluorouracil, Cytosine, Adenine, Guanine or analogues thereof     R=H, PO 3 H 2  
 
 Glycosidase Catalysis 
       

      Novel compounds in accordance with the invention are prodrugs of an antineoplastic nucleoside analog (or other antineoplastic agent) comprising a monosaccharide hexopyranose or hexofuranose covalently attached via the anomeric position to the 3′ or 5′ oxygen of the nucleotide analog, in particular such prodrugs wherein said hexopyranose or hexofuranose is selected from the group consisting of glucose, glucosamine, D-quinovopyranose, galactose, galactosamine, L-fucopyranose, L-rhamnopyranose, D-glucopyranuronic acid, D-galactopyranuronic acid, D-mannopyranuronic acid, or D-iodopyranuronic acid.  
      The haptens for a glycosyl prodrug of an antineoplastic nucleoside analog comprise an amidine analog of a monosaccharide hexopyranose or hexofuranose in which the nucleoside oxygen of attachment is replaced by NR 1  and the furanose or pyranose ring oxygen is replaced by NR 2 . Such haptens include amidine analogs of a monosaccharide hexopyranose or hexofuranose which is a structural analog of a sugar selected from the group consisting of glucose, glucosamine, D-quinovopyranose, galactose, galactosamine, L-galactopyranuronic acid, D-mannopyranuronic acid, or D-iodopyranuronic acid.  
      The compounds include compounds of the formula:  
                 
          R 2  and R 3  are H or OH but only one can be OH; X, X 1 , Y, Y 1 , Z, Z 1 , R and R 1  are as defined in the table below.        

      A novel coupling reaction to make β-glycosylated nucleosides of the invention from hexopyranoses and nucleosides is the direct reaction of the peracetylated hexoses and the 5′ hydroxy nucleosides in the presence of a Lewis acids such as TMS triflate, BF 3 Et 2 O etc. in the solvent, acetonitrile. This method can be extended to the sugars listed below to make the corresponding β-glycosylated nucleosides.  
      The coupling reaction can be accomplished also by activation of the anomeric position by conversion to SPh, F or imidate groups and subsequent reaction with the 5′ hydroxy nucleosides to make the corresponding glycosylated nucleosides.  
                 
 
      X, X 1 , Y, Y 1 , Z, Z 1 , R, R 1  and A are as defined in the table below.  
                              A = OAc, SPh, F, Imidate                                                     X 1     X   Y 1     Y   Z 1     Z   R   R 1                                                               Name of the sugar                                       Glucose   H   OH   H   OH   H   OH   CH 2 OH   H       Glucosamine   H   OH   H   OH   H   NH 2     CH 2 OH   H       D-Quinovopyranose   H   OH   H   OH   H   OH   CH 3     H       Galactose   OH   H   H   OH   H   OH   CH 2 OH   H       Galactosamine   OH   H   H   OH   H   NH 2     CH 2 OH   H       L-Fucopyranose   OH   H   H   OH   H   OH   CH 3     H       L-Rhamnopyranose   H   OH   H   OH   H   OH   CH 3     H       Hexuronic Acids:       D Glucopyranuronic acid   H   OH   H   OH   H   OH   COOH   H       D Galactopyranuronic acid   OH   H   H   OH   H   OH   COOH   H       D manopyranuronic acid   H   OH   H   OH   OH   H   COOH   H       D Iodopyranuronic acid   H   OH   H   OH   H   OH   H   COOH                  
 
      The coupling reaction of hexofuranoses at their anomeric position to the nucleoside 5′ position to make furanosylated nucleosides can be accomplished by the method described above.  
                 
          wherein R 2 =H and R 3 =OH or R 2 =OH and R 3 =H.        

      Coupling of hexofuranoses to nucleosides will make a mixture of anomers, because of the ring size.  
      D. Prodrug Activation By Glycosidase Reaction  
     
         
          1. Hexopyranose conjugated to drug hydroxyl group via the anomeric position of the sugar  
          2. Hexofuranose conjugated to drug hydroxyl group via the anomeric position of the sugar. 
 
 Glycosidase Prodrug 
 
       
    
      Included in the invention is a compound D1a having the formula: 
 
V-Q-X 
          wherein X is a radical of the drug XQH. Advantageously, XQH is a cytotoxic drug such as a nucleoside analog or phosphoramide mustard [HOP(O)(NH 2 )N(CH 2 CH 2 Cl) 2 ], melphalan or doxorubicin.     Q is O or NH, and     V is a hexopyranose or hexofuranose conjugated to QX via the anomeric position of the sugar with optional alpha or beta configuration.        

      Advantageously V is Glucose, Glucosamine, D-Quinovopyranose, Galactose, Galactosamine, L-Fucopyranose, L-Rhamnopyranose, D-Glucopyranuronic acid, D-Galactopyranuronic acid, D-manopyranuronic acid, or D-Iodopyranuronic acid.  
      Amidine haptens are prepared as transition-state analogs for eliciting an immune response to make catalytic antibodies. The amidine hapten mimics the transition state for the hydrolysis of the glycosidic bond. Because of the sofa/chair conformation of the hapten, antibodies raised to these haptens may cleave a wide variety of monosaccharide hexopyranoses.  
                 
          wherein R 2 =H and R 3 =OH or R 2 =OH and R 3 =H.        

      The synthesis of the haptens is accomplished by the coupling reaction of the appropriate lactam and the corresponding 5 amino nucleoside in the presence of triethyloxonium tetrafluoroborate in methylene chloride as the solvent.  
      A hapten (amidine TS analog) for galactose or equivalent sugar for the cleavage of the glycosidic bond to liberate drug, said hapten having the formula:  
                 
          R=Nucleoside, Sugar, or any equivalent drug 
 
 Glycosidase Hapten 1 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound D1b having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound Dl a, and which is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     Q′ is NH, and     M′ is 1,4-diradical of a n-pentane where C1, C2, C3 and C5 are optionally substituted with OH, and M′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Glycosidase Hapten 2 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound D1c having the formula:  
                 
          M′ is a 1,4-diradical of a n-pentane where C1, C2, C3 and C5 are optionally substituted with OH, and M′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Glycosidase Hapten 3 
       

      Useful as a hapten as well as a prodrug is a compound DI d having the formula:  
                 
          wherein X′ is an analog of X of compound D1a, and which is optionally linked to a carrier protein,     Q′ is CH 2 , and     M′ is a 1,4-diradical of a n-pentane where C1, C2, C3 and C5 are optionally substituted with OH, and M′ is optionally linked to a carrier protein. 
 
 Prodrugs of Nucleoside Analogs 
       

      A number of cytotoxic nucleoside analogs have utility as antitumor agents, though there is often a low margin of safety. Effective antineoplastic doses of these drugs can have serious side effects, Generally related to their toxicity toward normal tissues such as bone marrow or gastrointestinal mucosa.  
      5-Fluorouracil (5-FU) is a major antineoplastic drug with clinical activity in a variety of solid tumors, such as cancers of the colon and rectum, head and neck, liver, breast, and pancreas. 5-FU has a low therapeutic index. The size of the dose that is administered is limited by toxicity, reducing the potential efficacy that would be obtained if higher concentrations could be attained near tumor cells.  
      5-FU must be anabolized to the level of nucleotides (e.g., fluorouridine- or fluorodeoxyuridine-5′-phosphates in order to exert its potential cytotoxicity. The nucleosides corresponding to these nucleotides (5-fluorouridine and 5-fluoro-2′-deoxyuridine) are also active antineoplastic agents, and in some model systems are substantially more potent than 5-FU, probably because they are more readily convened to nucleotides than is 5-FU.  
      The methods for localized delivery of fluorouridine to tumor cells of the subject invention have the advantage of providing high concentrations at the tumor site(s) with minimal systemic exposure. Another degree of tumor selectively is obtained through the rapid catabolism of fluorouridine (to form, initially, the less toxic 5-FU) that is not immediately taken up by tumor cells.  
      Similarly, arabinosylcytosine (Ara-C) is widely used in treating leukemias and lympohomas. Ara-C is rapidly degraded by cytidine deaminase, producing the inactive metabolite arabinosyluracil. Therapeutic use of Ara-C often results in side effects related to bone marrow suppression or damage to gastrointestinal mucosa. Targeted delivery of Ara-C, e.g., into lymphomas, results in increased therapeutic efficacy with minimized side effects.  
      A similar argument and rationale holds true for other antineoplastic nucleoside analogs, including but not limited to: fluorouracil arabinoside, mercaptopurine riboside, 5-aza-2′-deoxycytidine, arabinosyl 5-azacytosine, 6-azauridine, azaribine, 6-azacytidine, trifluoromethyl-2′-deoxyuridine, thymidine, thioguanosine, 3-deazauridine.  
      In the present invention, prodrugs of antineoplastic nucleoside analogs are made by attaching an appropriate substituent to the 5′ position of the aldose ring. A substituent in this position reduces toxicity of the drug, since cytotoxic nucleoside analogs must typically be phosphorylated (yielding a nucleotide analog) in order to manifest their toxicity. Substituents on the 5′ position also render nucleoside analogs stable to the nucleoside-degrading enzymes uridine phosphorylase (which degrades uridine and analogs thereof) and cytidine deaminase (which degrades cytidine and analogs thereof). Prodrugs with substituents on the 3′ position of the aldose ring of antineoplastic nucleoside analogs are also useful for targeted delivery of antineoplastic nucleoside analogs.  
      Examples of nucleoside analog prodrugs and haptens are as follows:  
     5-Fluorouridine-5′-O-2,4,6 Trimethylbenzoate  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Phosphonate hapten for 5-fluorouridine-5′-O-2,4,6 Trimethylbenzoate  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Sulphonate hapten for 5-fluorouridine-5′-O-2,4,6 Trimethylbenzoate  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     5-Fluorouridine-5′-O-2,4,6 Trimethoxybenzoate  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Phosphonate Hapten for 5-fluorouridine-5′-O-2,4,6 Trimethoxybenzoate  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Sulphonate Hapten for 5-fluorouridine-5′-O-2,4,6 Trimethoxybenzoate  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     2,6-Dimethoxybenzoate  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Phosphonate Hapten for 5-fluorouridine-5′-O-2,6 Dimethoxybenzoate  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Sulphonate hapten for 5-fluorouridine-5′-O-2,6 Dimethoxybenzoate  
                         
 Prodrugs Of Alkylating Agents 
 
      The present invention also provides novel methods and compounds for achieving localized delivery and formation of active alkylating agents.  
      Prodrug substituents of the invention, attached to certain cyclophosphamide metabolites (e.g., 4-hydroxycyclophosphamide or aldophosphamide) prevents their enzymatic and chemical breakdown to cytotoxic products. An appropriate protein catalyst, conjugated to a tumor-selective reagent, is administered prior to the prodrug; the catalyst thereupon produces active alkylating species in the vicinity of tumor cells after subsequent administration of the prodrug.  
      The present invention utilizes prodrugs related to cyclophosphamide, which is the most widely used alkylating agent in clinical practice, with utility in treating cancers of breast, endometrium, and lung, as well as in treating leukemias and lymphomas. Cyclophosphamide, as such, is inactive and is converted primarily in the liver to 4-hydroxycyclophosphamide, which then breaks down further into cytotoxic metabolites. Thus, after cyclophosphamide administration, the active metabolites of cyclophosphamide are spread systemically via the circulation following release from the liver and cannot be concentrated in the area of tumor cells by, for example, localized injection. The active cytotoxic metabolites of cyclophosphamide are unstable or very toxic and thus, cannot be administered directly. Side effects of cyclophosphamide treatment include leukopenia, bladder damage, and alopecia. The present invention provides methods and compounds for providing suitable prodrugs of cytotoxic cyclophosphamide metabolites that are activated in one embodiment of the invention by catalytic antibodies.  
      Similar prodrugs and haptens related to other alkylating agents are within the scope of the invention. Other antineoplastic alkylating agents include but are not limited to alkyl sulfates such as busulfan, aziridines such as benzodepa or meturadepa, nitrosoureas such as carmustine, and nitrogen mustards such as chlorambucil, melphalan, ifosfamide or mechlorethamine.  
      Examples of aldophosphamide prodrugs and haptens are as follows:  
     Aldophosphamide-diethylacetal  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Hapten for Aldophosphamide-diethylacetal  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Hapten for aldophosphamide-diethylacetal  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Hapten for aldophosphamide-diethylacetal  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     2,4,6-Trimethoxybenzoate Ester of Enol Form of Aldophosphamide  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Phosphonate Hapten for 2,4,6-Trimethoxybenzoate Ester of Enol Form of Aldophosphamide  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
      Examples of melphalan prodrugs and haptens are as follows:  
     Melphalan-2-hydroxyethyl Benzoic Acid Amide  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Phosphonate Hapten for Melphalan-2-Hydroxyethyl Benzoic Acid Amide  
                         
 Prodrugs of Other Antineoplastic Agents 
 
      Prodrugs of a wide variety of antineoplastic agents are prepared by their conjugation to prodrug substituents of the invention. Ester or glycosyl substituents of the invention are appropriate for drugs with hydroxyl groups; amide substituents are appropriate for drugs containing amino groups (particularly primary amino groups); acetal substituents are appropriate for drugs containing aldehyde groups.  
      Doxorubicin and related anthracycline antineoplastic agents like daunorubicin and epirubicin are suitable drugs for targeted delivery using the methods of the invention. The primary amino group on the daunosamine ring of this class of drugs is a good site for attachment of ne of the amide substituents of the invention, and the hydroxyl groups on either the daunosamine ring or the aglycone moiety are suitable for attachment of an ester substituent of the invention. Such substituents reduce the cytoxicity of the anthracycline drugs; cytotoxicity is restored at the tumor site by an appropriate targeted catalytic protein.  
      Similarly, other antineoplastic drugs that are suitable for targeted delivery using the methods of the invention, include but are not limited to: folate antagonists like methotrexate or trimetrexate; podophyllin compounds like etoposide or teniposide, Vinca alkaloids like vincristine, vinblastine or vindesine; tubulin modifiers like taxol, antibiotics like dactinomycin, and bleomycins.  
      In addition, cytotoxic drugs which are not in themselves useful as antineoplastic agents in vivo, due to excessive toxicity to normal tissues, can be used as targeted antitumor agents using the methods and prodrug substituents of the invention. Such cytotoxic substances include the trichothecene toxins.  
      Examples of doxorubicin prodrugs and haptens are as follows:  
     Doxorubicin-benzoic Acid Amide  
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     Phosphonate Hapten for Doxorubicin-benzoic Acid Amide  
                         
 Catalytic Proteins for Activating Prodrugs and Targeting the Prodrugs 
 
 Catalytic Proteins for Activating Prodrugs 
 
      In addition to the development of suitable prodrugs, an appropriate catalytic protein for activation of these prodrugs (i.e. enhancing the rate of cleavage of the drug from the residue of the prodrug) must be selected in this therapeutic strategy  
      a. Enzymes for Activating Prodrugs  
      Enzymes, or active fragments thereof can be used with the novel prodrugs of the subject invention in cases where enzymes with appropriate catalytic activity exist The enzyme and catalytic activities used in the constructs of the subject invention are selected from: glycosidase, peptidase, lipase (or other hydrolases) oxido-reductase, transferase, isomerase, lyase or ligase.  
      Examples of enzymes for use with the novel prodrugs of the invention are described below: 
      A. Esterase—cleaves acyl substituents esterified to drugs 
        Carboxylesterase (E.C. 3.1.1.1)     Arylesterase (E.C. 3.1.1.2)     Triacylglycerol lipase (E.C. 3.1.1.3)     Acetylesterase (E.C. 3.1.1.6)     Galactolipase (E.C. 3.1.1.26)     Cephalosporin-C deacetylase (E.C. 3.1.1.41)     6-O-Acetylgucose deacetylase (E.C. 3.1.1.33)     lipase    
        B. Amidase—cleaves acyl substituents attached to amino groups 
        Peptidases (endo- and exopeptiases)     β-Lactamases (Classes A, B, and C) and Penicillin amidase     Acetylomithine deacetylase (E.C. 3.5.1.16)     Acyl-lysine deacylase (E.C. 3.5.1.17)    
        C. Acetal hydrolase—hydrolyzes acetals (or ortho esters) to aldehydes 
        Alkenyl-glycerophosphocholine hydrolase (E.C. 3.3.2.2)     Cellulase (E.C. 3.2.1.4)     Oligo-1,6-glucosidase (E.C. 3.2.1.10)     Lysozyme (E.C. 3.2.1.17)     β-D-Glucuronidase (E.C. 3.2.1.31)    
        D. Glycosidase—cleaves sugar substituents attached to drugs via an ether linkage Examples include beta-galactosidases, beta-glucosidases, inulases, alpha-L-arabinofuranosidases, agarases, and isomerases. Specific examples include: 
        β-D-Glucosidase (E.C. 3.2.1.21)     α-D-Glucosidase (E.C. 3.2.1.20)     β-D-Galactosidase (E.C. 3.2.1.22)     α-D-Galactosidase (E.C. 3.2.1.23)     β-D-Fructofuranosidase (E.C. 3.2.1.26)     α,α-Trehalase (E.C. 3.2.1.28)     α-L-Fucosidase (E.C. 3.2.1.51)     Glycosylceramidase (E.C. 3.2.1.62)    
       

      Lyases can be used with prodrugs which also serve as haptens.  
      The primary aim is to select an enzyme activity not normally present in the serum or other body compartments to which the drug is exposed, which is capable of activating the prodrug and does not cause significant damage to normal physiological compounds or macromolecules. Enzymes for use with the prodrugs can be selected using screening techniques such as those described below for catalytic antibodies  
      b. Antibodies for Activating Prodrugs  
      The catalytic antibodies or active fragments thereof used in the subject invention are those of the prior art (see the section above on catalytic antibodies in Background of the Invention) and those made using the novel haptens described herein (see the section above entitled Novel Prodrugs and Haptens of the Invention) with the techniques known to those skilled in the art for making catalytic antibodies. See U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,963,355, 4,888,281 and 4,792,446 hereby incorporated herein by reference.  
      Target Reagents  
      The targeting component of the targeting and activating compounds of the invention includes any agent which selectively binds or concentrates on or in the vicinity of a specific cell population for example, any antibody or other compound which binds specifically to a tumor-associated antigen (other examples include hormones, growth factors, substrates, or analogs of enzymes, etc.). Examples of such antibodies include, but are not limited to, those which bind specifically to antigens found on carcinomas, melanomas, lymphomas and bone and soft tissue sarcomas as well as other tumors. Antibodies that remain bound to the cell surface for extended periods or that are internalized very slowly are particularly advantageous. These antibodies are polyclonal or advantageously, monoclonal, and are intact antibody molecules or fragments containing the active binding region of the antibody.  
      The system, according to the invention, is used for delivering a drug at any host target site where treatment is required, providing the target site has one or more targetable components, for example, epitopes that are substantially unique to that site and which are recognized and bound by the immunoconjugate. Particular target sites include those regions in a host arising from a pathogenic state induced by, for example, a tumor, a bacterium, a fungus or a virus; or as a result of a malfunction of a normal host system, for example, in cardiovascular diseases, such as the formation of the thrombus, in inflammatory diseases, and in diseases of the central nervous system.  
      The use of genetic cloning and engineering methods have revolutionized the potential to generate reagents able to target an enzyme or catalytic antibody. This has been exemplified by the progress which has occurred in the area of immunology.  
      A. Antibodies Which Bind Tumor Cells  
      Advantageously, antibodies which bind antigens that are expressed in high density on tumor cells and that do not shed from the tumor are used in the subject invention. These prerequisites are identical to those used in the related field of tumor imaging and treatment using radiolabelled monoclonal antibodies.  
      A large number of monoclonal antibodies labelled with a variety of radionuclides, including  125 I,  131 I,  111 In,  99 mTc,  186 Re,  90 Y have been used to visualize tumors. This work has shown that a variety of tumors can be successfully visualized by radio-immunoscintigraphic techniques. The tumor types that have been successfully targeted are listed in the table below. Antibodies to the listed antigens for example, are useful to target the prodrug activation.  
                                               Tumor Type   Tissue   Mab   Antigen   Reference                  Carcinoma   G.I. tract with   NR-LU-10   40 kD glycoprotein   Goldrosen, M., et al.,           hepatic metastasis           Cancer Research 50                       (1990): 7973-7978       Adenocarcinoma   G.I. tract and other   FO23C5   Carcino-embryonic   Siccardi, A., Cancer           tissues       antigen (CEA)   Research 50                       (1990): 899s-903s       Carcinoma   Head/Neck and   E48   Peptide epitope within   Gerretsen, M., et al.,           Vulva       22 kD surface antigen   British Journal of Cancer                       63 (1991): 37-44       Carcinoma   Larynx, pharynx       CEA   Kairemo, K., et a., Acta           and parotid gland           Oncoloica 29                       (1990): 539-543       Carcinoma   Liver   NP-4   CEA   Wang, Z., et al., Cancer                       Research 50                       (1990): 869s-872s       Carcinoma   Breast       CEA   Kairemo, K., et al., Acta                       Oncologica 29                       (1990): 533-538       Carcinoma   Bladder   BW 431/26   CEA   Boekmann, W., et al.,                       British Journal of Cancer                       62 (1990): 81-84       Carcinoma   Ovary   HMFG1   Milk fat blobule glycoprotein   Hird, V., et al., British                   (&gt;200 kD)   Journal of Cancer 50                       (1990): 48-51       Carcinoma   Pancreas   DU-PAN1   Glycoprotein expressed   Worlock, A., et al.,                   in &gt;50% of pancreatic   Cancer Research 50                   tumors   (1990): 7246-7251       Melanoma   Xenograft in nude   G7A5   High molecular weight-   Le Doussal, J. M., et           mouse       melanoma associated   al., Cancer Research 50                   antigen (HMW-MAA).   (1990): 3445-3452                   Gp 220 core protein of                   chondroitin sulfate                   proteoglycan (250-280 kD).       Melanoma   Lymph node   225.28S   HMW-MAA (different   Wahl, R., et al., Cancer               and   epitopes)   Research 50               763.24T       (1990): 941s-948s       Glioma   Brain           Williams, J., et al.,                       Cancer Research 50                       (1990): 974s-979s       Glioma   Brain   EGFR1   External domain of   Kalofanos, H., et al., J.,                   human and rat epidermal   Nuc Med 30                   growth factor receptor   (1989): 1636-1645               H17E2   Placental alkaline                   phosphatase (67 kD)       Germ-cell   Testis   H17E2   Placental alkaline   Pectasides, D., et al.,       (seminoma and           phosphatase (67 kD)   British Journal of Cancer       non-seminoma)               62 (1990): 74-77                  
 
      In some cases the use of subfragments of antibodies e.g., F(ab′)2 has yielded enhanced specificity of tumor imaging when there has been shown to be a lower actual antigen concentration at the tumor site (Worlock, A., et al.,  Cancer Research  50 (1990):7246-7251; Gerretsen, M., et al.,  British Journal of Cancer  63 (1991):3744). Successful imaging has been possible even in patients with significant serum concentration of antigens shed from the tumor (CEA, Boeckmann, W., et al.,  British Journal of Cancer  62 (1990):81-84).  
      b. Other Targeting Proteins  
      In addition to the use of antibodies, any binding species is useful for binding a catalytic protein (be it enzyme or catalytic antibody) to the site of action. Growth factors have been used to deliver toxin molecules (Siegall, et al.,  Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA  85 (1985):9738-9742; Chaudhary, et al.,  Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA  84 (1987):45384542; Kondo J., et al.,  Biol. Chem.  263 (1988):9470-9475). Generation of analogous fusions using the growth factors interleukin 6, interleukin 2, transforming growth factor alpha, and others are made by linking enzymes or abzymes using the methods described in the above references. The incorporation of catalytic antibodies into these is done via the fusion of these growth factors to the end of antibody single chain gene constructs (Patent Application WO 88/01649) or alternatively the growth factors are fused to the front end of such gene constructs (at the 5′ end of the gene or amino terminus of the protein). The use of constructs as described in Patent Application EP A 0,194,276 (Neuberger) are also useful to combine catalytic antibody activity and the binding properties of growth factors.  
      The use of human CD4- Pseudomonas  exotoxin fusion has proved effective in the killing of HIV infected cells. The use of such a binding activity from CD4 linked to an enzyme or catalytic antibody allows the use of prodrug therapy directed at treatment of AIDS. The CD4 binds to the gp120 expressed on HIV1 infected cells. The converse of such a construct makes use of gp120enzyme (or catalytic antibody) fusion to develop an immunosuppression reagent system (Moore et al.,  Science,  250, (1990):1139). Other binding species which are useable in the subject invention are the integrin family e.g., LAF-1, which can be used to modulate the immune system (Inghirami et al.,  Science,  250, (1990):682) and the selection family e.g., ELAM, which can be used to target tumors and immune cells (Walz, et al.,  Science  250 (1990):1132).  
      Antibodies can also be used to target prodrugs of the invention to certain blood cell types to treat autoimmune disease. Further, cells overproducing hormones can be targeted.  
      Production of Bispecific Proteins  
      a. Production of Bispecific Proteins by Chemical Linkage of Enzymes or Catalytic Antibodies to Targeting Proteins  
      The enzymes of this invention can be covalently bound to the targeting proteins of this invention by techniques well known in the art such as the use of the heterobifunctional cross-linking reagents SPDP (N-succinimidyl-3(2-pyridyldithio)proprionate) or SMCC (succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl) cyclohexane-1-carboxylate [see, e.g., Thorpe, P. E., et al., “The Preparation and Cytotoxic Properties of Antibody-Toxin Conjugates.”  Immunological Rev.,  62 (1982):119-58; Lambert, J. M., et al., supra at p. 12038; Rowland, G. F., et al., supra, at pp. 183-84 and Gallego, J., et al., supra, at pp. 737-381.  
      b. Production of Bispecific Proteins by Recombinant DNA  
      Fusion proteins comprising at least the antigen binding region of the targeting protein of the invention linked to at least a functionally active portion of an enzyme or catalytic antibody of the invention can be constructed using recombinant DNA techniques well known in the art [see, e.g., Neuberger, M. S., et al., Nature 312, (1984):604-608]. These fusion proteins act in essentially the same manner as the antibody-enzyme conjugates described herein.  
      Recombinant DNA methods have been used to express antibody genes in mammalian systems (Oi, V. T., et al.,  Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA  80 (1983):825-829; Neuberger, M. S.,  EMBO  2 (1983):1373-1378). Further expression and recovery of biologically active immunoglobulin proteins (human IgE Fc fragment) from  E. coli  has beer demonstrated (Kenten, J. H., et al.,  Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA  81 (1984):2955-2960) and expression and recovery of whole active antibody has been demonstrated (Boss, M. A., et al.,  Nucleic Acids Res.  12 (1984):3791-3799). This was followed by other groups demonstrating the generality of the potential to generate both immunoglobulin binding and effector function activities in  E. coli  (Cabilly, S., et al.,  Proc Natl. Acad Sci USA  81 (1984):3273-3277; Skerra, A., et al.,  Science  240 (1988):1038-1040; Better, M., et al.,  Science  240 (1988):1041-1043). These skills and abilities have also been applied to manipulation of many other genes.  
      The following are examples of the prodrug targeting reagents. Most of these depend on the ability to clone, manipulate and express genes as described above.  
      The use of genetically engineered antibodies as outlined above provide a route to a well-defined and reproducible reagent which allow the rapid analysis of the effectiveness of the various prodrugs. These methods of antibody engineering are exemplified in European Patent Application EP A 0,194,276 (Neuberger) in which the heavy chain gene is truncated by removal of the CH 2  and CH 3  domains, followed by the addition of various genes. Introduction of the required enzymatic activity follows these basic procedures. To achieve the optimized level of enzyme activity, manipulation of the sequences between the antibody and enzyme may be needed. Addition of linker sequences and/or alteration of the fusion site may be needed for this optimization. In addition, to the advantage of a defined antibody-enzyme reagent, the reduced size possible by the removal of the CH 2  CH 3 , and the C14 in the case if IgE and IgM heavy chains, is valuable.  
      Generation of antibodies which are bispecific is well-known to the art (Shawler, et al.,  Immunol.  135 (1985):1530-1535; Kurokawa, T., et al.,  Bio/Technology  7 (1989):1163-1167). Examples of the functionality of such bispecific antibodies are the tumor specific antibodies which also bind to metal chelates for use in tumor therapy, and also the bispecific antibodies which bind to tumor cells and T cells (Johnson, M. J., et al., Patent Application EP 369566A, 1990; and Gilliland L. K., et al., Patent Application GB 2197323, 1986). Methods for generation of bispecific antibodies consist of chemical methods of separation and recombination of the antibody chains or by the fusion of the two hybridomas to generate so called quadromas. These methods are effective but are prone to generate mixed species and require purification to isolate the desired products.  
      Generation of smaller binding species has been the goal of much research in antibody engineering. This has led to the development of single chain antibodies, in which the variable (V) region of the two antibody chains are combined into a single molecule using a linker sequence (Patent Application WO 88/01649, Ladner and Bird). This combination of V regions results in expression of a protein which has one of the V regions at the amino terminus and the other V region attached at its COOH terminus via the linker to its amino terminus. This head to tail, head to tail linkage of V regions has been described with both V light chain—V heavy chain and V heavy chain—V light chain orientations. The utility of these systems has been developed with the addition to single chain antibodies of other proteins (Vijay, et al.,  Nature  339 (1989):394-397). This format, for the addition of other proteins to the end of single chain antibodies, is used for the production of similar molecules making use of desired enzyme genes to affect these constructions. This results in the production of molecules having the desired properties of antibody binding and enzymatic activity in a small molecule ideally suited for therapy.  
      To engineer the production of two antibody activities into a bispecific molecule in a single chain or equivalent small molecule follows the outline below using methods well known to those skilled in the art.  
      The construct would consist of: the V Heavy chain region (VH) linked to the V Light chain region (VL); specific for the tumor cell or antigen via the linkers described for single chain antibodies (Vijay, et al.,  Nature  339 (1989):394-397; Patent Application WO 88/01649, Ladner and Bird); these sequences are linked directly to the catalytic antibody VL which would, in turn, be linked to its VH partner via a linker sequence. The V region combinations can also follow VL-VH-VH-VL or VL-VH-VL-VH or VH-VL-VH-VL sequences. The linker sequences used in these constructions are those described above for single chain antibody construction. This combination allows the expression of a single chain bispecific antibody previously unknown. Such a molecule allows the production of large amounts of such a bispecific activity without the purification and characterization problems encountered with other methods. This molecule also has the low molecular weight desirable for such a reagent. Another species based on similar construction describes a previously unknown molecule as follows. The VH region specific for the tumor or antigen linked directly to the VL region of the catalytic antibody; this molecule is advantageously expressed separately or together with the other construct of VL specific for the tumor or antigen linked directly to the VH of the catalytic antibody. The expression products of these two molecules together, or by post expression mixing, associate to form a bispecific antibody. Other combinations of V regions lead to similar molecules. This molecular species is favored over the molecule above as it has a lower molecular weight. The use of single domain binding proteins is also valuable to explore in the form of direct fusions to enzymes or catalytic antibodies (Patent Application WO 90/05144, Winter).  
      Humanization of Antibodies  
      Humanization of antibodies and other reagents reduces the immune response. Reagent antigenicity has been a problem in early mouse antibody treatments which have been made ineffective by patients mounting a significant antibody response to the mouse antibodies (Patent Application EP A 0 194 276, Neuberger; Patent Application EP A 0 239 400; LoBuglio, A. F., et al.,  Proc Natl Acad Sci USA  86 (1989):4220-4224). The immune response is not only associated with the constant regions of the antibody but is also with the variable region domains giving rise to a strong anti-idiotypic response (Bruggemann, M., et al.,  J. Exp. Med.  170 (1989):2153-2157; Shawler, D. L., et al.,  Immunol.  135 (1985):1530-1535).  
      The value of humanization methods for the generation of therapeutically valuable proteins has been demonstrated by humanization of mouse antibodies by replacement of the V-region framework. This humanization method makes use of the basic structure of the binding site with its antigen-binding loops which are fairly well determined (Kabat, E. A., et al., U.S. Dept of Health and Human Services, U.S. Government Printing Office, 1987). The replacement of the framework with human sequences while retaining the loops from the original antibody effectively transfers the antigen binding from a mouse to a human structural context (Riechmann, L., et al.,  Nature  332 (1988):323-327; Jones, P. T., et al.,  Nature  321 (1986):522-524; Verhoeyen, M., et al.,  Science  239 (1988):1534-1536; Queen, C., et al.,  Proc Natl Acad Sci USA  86 (1989):10029-10033). With this humanization technology certain assumptions have been made; A) the contribution of the hypervariable loops to binding; B) the conservation of framework structure, and that C) the loops all interact with the framework in similar ways. With the use of basic molecular modelling, the humanization can be optimized improving the degree of success (Riechmann, L., et al.,  Nature  332 (1988):323-327).  
      These methods aimed at humanization are applicable to enzyme activities. The use of structural analysis allows grafting of homologous outer loop regions in order to camouflage the antigenicity, if enzymes with similar structures to a human protein can be found. Problems of antigenicity can also be obviated by the use of covalent modification i.e., polyethylene glycol modification of the surface of the protein.  
      Antibody Expression Vectors  
      Recent advances in the application of PCR cloning of immunoglobulin genes has led to the ability to produce antibody expression libraries in  E. coli  using phage lambda. (Huse, W. D., et al.,  Science  246 (1989):1275-1281) and the filamentous phage fd (Clarkson, T., et al.,  Nature  352, (1991):624-628). The phage lambda based system generates a library of phage plaques that secrete Fab which can then be screened by a filter binding assay using radiolabeled hapten (Caton, A. J., et al.,  PNAS, USA  87 (1990):6450-6454). Although potentially valuable for isolating plaques with a desired binding activity, each clone must be individually screened if one is attempting to isolate an antibody mediated catalytic activity. The phage fd system for expressing single chain FV antibodies as described in Patent Application WO 92/01047, and incorporated herein by reference describes the production of phage particles that carry antibody FV&#39;s fused to the phage gene III protein. This system allows for the direct selection of phage and the genes coding for the specific antibodies expressed on the phage particle by using antibody binding to antigens or haptens. Rare antibodies have been isolated from combinatorial libraries using this method (Marks, J. D., et al., J. Mol. Biol. 222 (1991):581-597).  
      An alternative approach, not previously described, is to use a plasmid based rather than phage lambda based system for production of the antibody expression library. In this system, rather than having the VH and VL genes as separate transcription units, they are covalently linked by a short peptide to produce a single chain antibody as defined by Bird, E., et al.,  Science  242 (1988):423-426). Using appropriate PCR primers, a combinatorial single chain antibody library consisiting of essentially random associations of VH and VL is generated by a single step PCR methodology previously described (Davis, G. T., et al.,  Bio/Technology  (1991) in press.). The single-chain PCR product is cloned into a suitable  E. coli  expression vector containing an inducible promotor such as Ptac. A signal sequence, such as pelB, is added 5′ of the cloned single-chain to allow secretion of the expressed antibody protein (Better, M., et al.,  Science  240 (1988):1041-1043). Unlike the phage lambda expression system in which the  E. coli  are lysed, the plasmid based expression system described allows the possibility of directly screening an  E. coli  library for catalytic antibodies using direct selection. One possible selection method, inactivation of a beta-lactam or beta-lactam derivative, is described in the section “Screening for Catalytic Antibodies”. Other possible selection methods include antibody catalyzed release of a nutrient, vitamin or cofactor essential for the growth of the  E. coli . One such selection procedure utilizing thymidine requiring auxotrophs is described in section Screening for Catalytic Activation of Nucleoside Analogue Prodrugs, herein.  
      VH and VL domains from  E. coli  clones that express antibody with a desired binding or catalytic activity can be mutagenized to alter or enhance antibody function. The specific CDR amino acid residue(s) to be targeted for mutagenesis can be identified by molecular modelling of the antibody active site. Mutagenesis is accomplished by one of a variety of previously described site-directed mutagenesis procedures using mutagenic oligonucleotides (Maniatis, T., et al.,  Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual , (1989):15.51-15.65, New York: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory).  
      If selective mutagenesis is not able to produce the desired result more extensive alterations of the active site are made. One useful methodology is replacement of one, few or several CDRs with sets or partial sets of random amino acids. This random mutagenesis procedure was successfully used to alter the activity of a beta-lactamase enzyme (Dube, D. K., et al.  Biochemistry  28 (1989):5703-5707; Oliphant, A. R., et al.,  PNAS , USA 86 (1989):9094-9098). The method described involved introduction of random amino acids into the enzyme active site by replacement of the DNA sequence encoding that portion of the active site with a random oligonucleotide.  
      Random mutagenesis of an antibody CDR region is accomplished by any of a number of different methods. One example of a protocol that is used to randomly mutagenize CDR1 VH of an anti-fluorescein monoclonal antibody (Mab 4-4-20, Bedzyk, W. D., et al.,  JBC  264 (1989):1565-1569) is presented in detail below.  
      1. An oligonucleotide of the following sequence shown below is synthesized on an automated DNA synthesizer. The number above certain nucleotide triplets corresponds to the amino acid position within 4-4-20 VH as designated by Bedzyk, et al., (1989).  
                             21               25          30               (CDR1)        35           5′TCC TGT GTT GCC TCT GGA TTC ACT TTT AGT (NNKNNKNNKNNK) AAC TGG                                            40           GCT CGC CAG TCT CCA GAG AAA GGA-3′          
       In the sequence above (SEQ ID NO:1), VH CDR1 (amino acids 31-34) is replaced with a random nucleotide sequence where N is A, C, G, or T (equimolar) and K is G or T (equimolar). Excluding A or C at the third position in each triplet will reduce the number of potential termination codons by two thirds as reported by Cwirla, S. E., et al.,  PNAS, USA  87 (1990):6378-6382.     2. A second oligonucleotide is synthesized which is complimentary to the last 20 base pairs at the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide from Step 1. Following phosporylation with T4 kinase, oligonucleotides are annealed and then added to a primer extension reaction containing deoxynucleotides and Kienow fragment. The resulting full length double stranded random oligonucleotide is purified by polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or reverse phase HPLC.     3. Double stranded random oligonucleotide from Step 2 can serve as a “sticky foot” primer in the “sticky foot” mutagenesis procedure described by Clackson, T., et al.,  NAR  17 (1989):10163-10170. This procedure will result in replacement of the wild type VH CDR1 present in the template strand with a random CDR1 sequence specified by the random oligonucleotide described in Step 1.     4. Following sticky foot mutagenesis the DNA from Step 3 is used to transform  E. coli  resulting in an antibody library in which VH CDR1 is replaced with a random sequence.     5. The resulting library can be screened by binding assays with appropriate hapten or selection assays as described in preceding sections of the patent.    

      Additional CDR regions of either VH or VL can be randomly mutagenized in a similar fashion. In addition, one, two, or all three CDR regions within a VH or VL chain can be mutagenized simultaneously. Due to limitations on the length of an oligonucleotide that can be synthesized on an automated machine, 3 separate random oligonucleotides corresponding to each of the 3 CDR regions can be made as described in Step 1 above. During oligonucleotide synthesis, restriction sites are incorporated at appropriate positions within framework regions that flank each of the CDRs. Following conversion into double stranded DNA as in Step 2 above, each oligonucleotide is digested with the appropriate restriction enzyme and the oligonucleotides are ligated together to produce a complete VH or VL. The final ligated product is then used as a “sticky foot” primer as in Step 3 above.  
      An alternative approach to the method described above is to engineer restriction enzyme sites into the framework regions on each side of the CDR VH or VL to be mutagenized. During synthesis of the random oligonucleotide as in Step 1 above, compatible restriction sites are then added to the framework flanking regions. Restriction sites are chosen so as to best preserve the wild type coding sequence within the framework region. The wild type CDR region is then removed by digesting with the appropriate restriction enzyme and replaced with the double stranded random oligonucleotide digested with compatible restriction enzymes.  
      Selection of News Binding Activities Using Mutagenesis and Selection in Filamentous Phage  
      Selection of mutant antibodies by selection for growth under selective conditions has been illustrated (see the section entitled, “Screening of Mutant Catalytic Antibodies in  E. coli ). In concert with these methods for selection and mutagenesis, the use of methods described by Cwirla S., et al.,  PNAS,  87 (1990):6378-6382; and McCafferty J., et al.,  Nature,  348 (1991):552-554 help generate/improve catalytic antibodies for prodrug activation.  
      These methods have allowed for the generation of vast libraries of peptides and the screening via the binding of the resultant mutants by taking the mutant single chain antibodies generated in the protocol as outlined above and inserting these into the adsorption protein (gene III) of the filamentous bacteriophage, fd. The site for the introduction of the PCR cloned and mutagenized single chain antibody is 5-6 amino acids from the N terminus of the adsorption protein (gene III). This allows for the presentation of the antibody for binding to antigen. The vector (fd-CAT1) after insertion of the single chain antibody gene is then used to electrotransform  E. coli  TG1 (K12, (lac-pro), supE, thi, hsdD5/F traD36, proA+B+lacIq, lacZM15) or similar host.  
      The transformed  E. coli  are then subjected to selection using the tetracycline resistance of the vector. This phage library is cultured on plates allowing its amplification and the estimation of the library size (library sizes in the range of 10 12  allow the screening of random mutants at 9 sites in the antibody).  
      This library is then subjected to amplification in liquid culture the resultant phage in the supernatant are concentrated using polyethylene glycol precipitation and dissolved in PBS with 2% skimmed milk powder. These phage are then mixed with, for example 100 μl of solid phase-antigen, such as epoxy activated Sepharose CL-6B (Sigma Ltd) reacted with a suitable antigen, for the selection of the desired binding activity. The candidate compounds for use in this selection would include those haptens described herein. These antigens used for the raising of antibodies can also be coupled indirectly to a solid phase, such as epoxy activated Sepharose CL-6B, via coupling to a protein carrier. The choice of carrier protein is made such that the protein used for immunization would not be used, preventing the potential of isolating non-specific antibodies to the carrier protein.  
      Ensuing the binding, adsorbed phage is then separated by centrifugation followed by a series of wash steps removing the non-specific or weakly binding activities. The nature of the wash steps is such as to select for the type and nature of the interactions with the antigen of choice, i.e. selection of high salt washes would reduce the binding due to ionic interactions, or use of ethylene glycol would enable the reduction of hydrophobic interactions in favor of other binding affinities for example. An enhanced selection based on these wash conditions is not restricted to these broad based wash conditions but would also encompass the use of specific wash protocols based on the use of related antigens or substrates for the desired reaction. The elution of pools of phage is also based on the same set of criteria as used for the washes. The results of the combination of these approaches allowed selection of a vast matrix of related binding activities.  
      The desired pool(s) of binding activity is then amplified and subjected to detailed analysis of their binding and catalytic properties. The application of these types of selective washes and elutions enables the selection of desired properties. This need not be the final step in the process of mutagenesis and selection but is a stage on the route the desired structures with catalytic activity. Thus, this protocol would allow successive rounds of selections to mature the binding site.  
      The isolated potential candidate antibodies with or without catalytic activity are then introduced in the expression systems described above for the selection of activity based on the further selection directly for catalytic activity using antibiotic or auxotrophic selection (see Section B, Part 2). Also, these candidate molecules are selected for further rounds of mutagenesis and selection using this phage system. The technical details of this phage library approach are described in the publications by Cwirla, S., et al.,  PNAS,  87 (1990):6378-6387; and McCafferty, J., et al.,  Nature,  348 (1991):552-554 and Patent Application WO 92/01047.  
      Screening for Catalytic Antibodies  
      A. Selection of Antibodies for Beta-Lactamase Activity  
      Selection of catalytic activation of monolactam-based prodrugs can be done using antibodies produced by hybridomas or by mutating antibodies in  E. coli  to improve catalytic efficiency of existing antibodies.  
      1. Screening Hybridoma-Based Antibodies for Beta-Lactamase Activity  
      In vitro detection of catalytic hydrolysis of monolactam prodrugs can be carried out with either hybridoma supernatant antibodies immobilized to plastic 96 well plates (by a method described below) or in solution with antibodies purified from ascites fluid.  
      Immobilization: Those hybridomas producing antibodies binding to hapten in an ELISA assay were selected for screening. Supernatants were pooled from exhausted 5 mL cultures, and the pH adjusted to 7-7.5 with 2N NaOH (20 μL). Cell debris was removed by centrifugation for 30 minutes at 2700 rpm, and supernatants (4 μL) were decanted into clean polypropylene tubes. Anti-mouse immunoglobulin affinity gel (Calbiochem, binding capacity 0.5-2 mg of immunoglobulin per mL of gel) was added as a 50% slurry in PBS (140 μL, containing 70 μL of gel) and the resulting suspensions were mixed gently for 16 hours at 25° C. A 96 well Millititer GV filtration plate (Millipore) was pre-wetted and washed in PBS containing 0.05% Tween-20. The affinity gel suspensions were spun in a centrifuge at 2500 rpm for 15 min, the bulk of the supernatant was removed, and the residual slurries (250 μL) from each polypropylene tube were each transferred to separate wells in the 96 well filter plate. Residual supernatant was removed by aspiration through the filter plate and the immobilized antibody was washed at 4° C. with PBS/Tween (5×200 μL), PBS (3×200 μL), and 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.2 (3×200 μL).  
      Following appropriate incubation of antibody with prodrug, separation of drug from unhydrolyzed prodrug is accomplished by standard HPLC procedures. Hydrolysis of the prodrugs will result in liberation of an aromatic drug that can be easily detected by absorbance spectroscopy. Detection and quantitation of drug produced can be quantitated by an online spectral detector.  
      2. Screening Antibodies in  E. Coli  for Beta-Lactamase Activity  
      Efficiencies of catalytic antibodies are often substantially below those of natural enzymes. If current technologies are used to raise catalytic antibodies, many will be unsuitable for effective commercial use without improvement by chemical or genetic alteration. Catalytic antibodies with β-lactamase activity will be particularly amenable for improvement by genetic mutation because their catalytic activity provides a rapid and convenient means by which host colonies of  E. coli  expressing antibody can be screened for activity. Because  E. coli  (especially certain hypersensitive strains (Imada, A., et al.,  Nature  289 (1981):590-591; Dalbadie-McFarland, G., et al.,  Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA  79 (1982):6409-6413) is killed by β-lactam antibiotics, a secreted antibody with β-lactamase activity will confer resistance to β-lactam toxicity. The more catalytically efficient the mutant antibody, the higher the minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC) of antibiotic for the host  E. coli . Methods such as random mutagenesis of the genes for mildly catalytic antibodies will result in large numbers of  E. coli  colonies, creating large numbers of unique antibodies. Increased resistance to an appropriate β-lactam antibiotic will provide a rapid and efficient basis for screening enormous numbers of mutants and signal those antibodies with efficiencies above those of wild type antibodies.  
      Prodrug Strategy: Elimination of an Active Drug from the β-Lactam Ring  
      An active drug can be generated from an inactive prodrug as a consequence of hydrolysis of a substituted monocyclic β-lactam ring:  
                 
 
      The substituents (R and R′) will specifically depend on what is required to make the β-lactam an effective agent for disrupting the cell wall of a β-lactamase enzyme-deficient  E. coli  causing death or impaired growth. In addition, these substituents optionally are used in coupling a carrier protein (KLH or BSA) during immunization.  
      Cloning And Mutation of Antibodies to Improve Catalytic Activity  
      Antibody genes producing catalytic antibodies will be cloned and expressed in  E. coli . It will be critical to use a strain of  E. coli  that is hypersensitive to β-lactam antibiotics (i.e., one that lacks natural defenses against β-lactam antibiotics). Such strains exist that lack β-lactamase enzymes and/or penicillin binding proteins (Imada, A., et al.,  Nature  289 (1981):590-591; Dalbadie-McFarland, G., et al.,  Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA  79 (1982):6409-6413).  E. coli  colonies will contain plasmid DNA encoding antibody genes mutated by either site-directed or random mutagenesis. The organisms will express and secrete altered antibody. Because many clones will be generated, each clone secreting antibodies of a different amino acid sequence, a rapid and labor-unintensive method of determining which mutants have increased catalytic activity will be used.  
      Screening of Mutant Catalytic Antibodies in  E. Coli    
      A sensitive and convenient method to screen  E. coli  mutants producing antibodies with β-lactamase activity is to detect the altered ability of the mutant to resist toxicity of a β-lactam antibiotic that resembles the prodrug. A preferred feature of this method is that the structures of the hapten, the prodrug, and the effective antibiotic used in screening all be similar enough to be recognized by the antibody. The hapten must elicit antibodies that not only bind and hydrolyze the prodrug but also an antibiotic (prodrug minus the drug) used to challenge the host organism,  E. coli . An additional feature to be considered in the design of the prodrug is that upon hydrolysis it must expel the active drug. Based on these criteria, a number of different structures can be used for the prodrug as described elsewhere herein. One attractive example is to have a prodrug derivative of the monobactam antibiotic, aztreonam (Koster, W. H., et al.,  Frontiers of Antibiotic Research , ed. H. Umezawa., (1987):211-226 Orlando, Academic Press).  
                 
 
      Aztreonam is an effective antibiotic against  E. coli  (MIC=0.1 mg/mL) and is not degraded by human enzymes in the bloodstream. Haptens can be designed and prepared that hydrolyze the β-lactam ring of modified aztreonam to give elimination of an active drug.  
                 
 
      Screening (in hypersensitive strains of  E. coli ) for efficient catalytic antibody-producing mutants is accomplished by challenging the host antibody-secreting colonies with aztreonam itself rather than with the actual prodrug. This is done because aztreonam (or a similar antibiotic) itself is an effective antibiotic against  E. coli  although it is not always clear what effect the addition of the drug (modified aztreonam) may have on aztreonam&#39;s antibiotic properties. The presence of the drug portion may abolish or diminish the antibiotic action of aztreonam on  E. coli . Screening with aztreonam rather than with the larger aztreonam-drug conjugate is acceptable because the antibodies are raised to a hapten that included the drug or an analog thereof and mutant antibodies will retain the capability to bind the drug. Screening is done by standard methods such as agar dilution (Sigal, I. S., et al.,  Natl Acad. Sci. USA  79 (1982):7157-7160; Sowek, J. A., et al.,  Biochemistry  30 (1991):3179-88) or by using concentration gradients of aztreonam (Schultz, S. C., et al.,  J. Proteins  2 (1987):290-297).  
      Characterization of Mutants  
       E. coli  colonies found to be resistant to aztreonam are grown in larger quantities so that milligrams of antibody can be expressed and purified for further in vitro characterization. At this stage, antibodies will be purified and characterized in a buffered solution. A critical kinetic property is the ability to efficiently hydrolyze the β-lactam prodrug resulting in elimination of the active drug species. Lack of strong product inhibition by the prodrug (substrate), hydrolyzed aztreonam, or by the activated drug is required as well as efficient hydrolysis in human serum.  
      B. Isolation of Catalytic Antibodies that Activate Nucleoside Analog Prodrugs  
      Catalytic antibodies that activate nucleoside analog prodrugs can be isolated by either of two general principles; in vivo by selection methods or screening antibodies or phage-expressing antibodies by physicochemical methods (screening methods). The in vivo isolating method described below can be applied to screening antibodies for all of the nucleoside analog prodrugs. The screening methods are divided into two types based on the two kinds of inactivating groups claimed. One type of screening methods detects esterase activity and the other detects glycosidase activity. Screening can either be applied to antibodies purified from mouse ascites fluid, or at an earlier stage, to antibodies present in hybridoma supernatants. The methods listed here are specifically described for early screening of hybridoma supernatants for catalytic activity but can easily be adapted for the screening and assay of monoclonal antibodies purified from ascites.  
      1. Screening Of Catalytic Activation of Nucleoside Analog Prodrugs.  
      Screening is either carried out at an early stage in hybridoma supernatants using the immobilization procedures described in section A, or at a later stage using antibodies puried from mouse ascites.  
      Screening Antibodies For Galactosidase Catalytic Activity: To either antibody free in solution or antibody washed and immobilized, a solution of the prodrug in the appropriate assay buffer is added. Following incubation at 25° C. for a time dependent on the uncatalyzed rate of prodrug activation, formation of activated drug is measured. The substrate solution is either removed from the well (in the immobilization method) to determine the extent of product formation or the product is measured in situ (as in the case of antibody free solution).  
      Detection of prodrug activation is carried out by colorometric or fluorometric determination of the generation of galactose, which accompanies prodrug activation.  
      One of a number of possible galactose detection methods is employed. Some sensitive and specific detection methods follow:  
      1. Radiolabelling of Free Galactose with  32 P-Phosphate.  
      a) Galactokinase (E.C. 2.7.1.6) is commercially available (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, USA) and catalyzes the following reaction; 
 
galactose+ATP→galactose-1-phosphate+ADP 
 
      If the ATP (adenosine triphosphate) used has  32 P in the gamma phosphate position, free galactose generated by catalytic antibodies becomes radioactively-labelled. Labelled galactose-1-phosphate is separated from the other constituents in the reaction mixture by thin layer chromatography (TLC) or high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) and quantitated by scintillation counting.  
      2. Detection of Catalysis Using Fluorescent or Chromophoric Aldehyde-Reactive Reagents.  
      In this type of detection method, galactose is non-catalytically reacted with commercially available (from, for example, Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, Oreg.) aldehyde-reactive reagents to yield a colored or fluorescent derivative. The product of the reaction with galactose is isolated by HPLC or by TLC and detected by absorbance or by fluorescence by standard means.  
      One potential reagent is dansyl hydrazine (Molecular Probes, Inc.). Dansyl hydrazine reacts under mild conditions with aldehydes to give a fluorescent product (Eggert, F. M., et al., L  Chromatogr.  333 (1985):123; Avigad, G.,  J. Chromatogr.  139 (1977):343) that is detectable at low concentrations upon TLC or HPLC of the reaction mixture. Other potential reagents that are more useful than dansyl hydrazine because of possible lower detection limits, greater reaction specificity, or milder reaction conditions are other fluorescent hydrazides that are commercially available such as coumarin hydrazide, fluorescein thiosemicarbazide (Molecular Probes, Inc.). These reagents are compared to see which best suits the specific requirements.  
      3. Detection of Galactose with Color-Generating Specific Enzymes.  
      a) One enzyme that can be used to detect galactose is galactose dehydrogenase (E.C. 1.1.1.48) (Sigma Chemical Company, SL Louis, Mo., USA) which catalyzes the following oxidation-reduction reaction; 
 
galactose+NAD+(no color)→galactonate+NADH (color)+H+
 
      The oxidation of galactose is accompanied by the reduction of nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD + ). The reduced form of NAD + , NADH, is colored and its appearance is monitored spectrophotometrically at 340 nm.  
      b) An alternative enzyme that is useful in detecting galactose is galactose oxidase, (E.C. 1.1.3.9) which, used in combination with peroxidase and o-tolidine, will cause a color change in response to the presence of free galactose generated by a catalytic antibody. The coupled reactions are as follows. The first reaction is catalyzed by galactose oxidase and the second by peroxidase, both available from Sigma Chem. Company; 
          1. galactose+O 2    galactonate+H 2 O 2       2. H 2 O 2 +o-tolidine H 2 O+“colored product”       

      The colored product generated can be measured spectrophotometricauy.  
      Screening Antibodies For Esterase Catalytic Activity: To immobilized washed antibody or antibody free in solution, a solution of the prodrug (unless otherwise indicated) in the appropriate assay buffer is added. Following incubation at a suitable temperature such as 25° C. for a time dependent on the uncatalyzed rate of prodrug activation, formation of activated drug is measured as described.  
      Detection of prodrug formation can be detected by pH change that accompanies ester hydrolysis in weakly buffered solutions. Changes in pH can be detected by including an acid-base indicator in the solution, such as phenol red (Benkovic, P. A., et al.,  Biochemistry  18 (1979):830), which changes color with pH change. Alternatively, a method that is more sensitive is to use a pH stat or pH meter equipped with a fine-tipped electrode that can be inserted into the wells (Lazar Research Laboratories, Los Angeles, Calif.) to measure pH changes. For screens involving measuring changes in pH, it may be necessary during the incubation to keep the wells under nitrogen or argon gas to prevent pH changes from atmospheric carbon dioxide.  
      Hydrolysis of aromatic ester-protected prodrugs results in the liberation of an acidic aromatic group which can easily be separated by conventional chromatographic means on an HPLC (anion exchange or reverse phase columns). Furthermore, detection of the aromatic ring eluting from the HPLC can be easily accomplished using an online UV absorbance detector.  
      A third method for in vitro detection of hydrolysis of aromatic ester nucleoside analogs is to use an enzyme-linked assay. One inexpensive commercially-available enzyme (Sigma Chemical Company, SL Louis, Mo.) that could be used for this purpose is thymidine phosphorylase (E.C. 2.4.2.4). This enzyme converts the substrates thymidine and orthophosphate to the products thymine and 2-deoxy-D-ribose-1-phosphate. Rather than the prodrug being screened here, a conjugate of the inactivating ester with thymidine will be used (the same types of compounds that will be used in biological screening with auxotrophic bacterial mutants). This enzyme will not catalyze the phosphorylation of the aromatic ester protected thymidine, but only free thymidine produced by the catalytic antibody. To the wells will be added the thymidine phosphorylase, the thymidine version of the prodrug, and  32 P-labelled orthophosphate. After incubation of the buffered components with the immobilized antibodies, aliquots are run on TLC to separate radiolabelled orthophosphate and 2-deoxy-D-ribose-1-phosphate. The  32 P can then be detected on the TLC plates by autoradiography.  
      2. Thymidine Auxotrophic Selection for Isolation of Catalytic Antibodies with Esterase Activity for Nucleoside Analogue Prodrugs  
      Bacterial expression of antibodies promises to provide large numbers of different antibodies to screen for catalytic activity. However, the usefulness of this methodology is dependent on the availability of effective methods of selecting those colonies producing active antibody. A powerful approach is to use biological selection, in which only those colonies producing catalytic antibody are able to survive. One way in which this selection can be carried out is for the catalytic antibody to supply a particular nutrient in which the bacteria are deficient; survival is dependent on the antibody cleaving a substrate which releases the required nutrient. This type of selection to obtain prodrug-cleaving catalytic antibodies, is described below.  
      To produce a catalytic antibody capable of cleaving a prodrug, thereby releasing a nucleoside analogue (e.g., fluorouridine, fluorodeoxyuridine, fluorouridine arabinoside, cytosine arabinoside, adenine arabinoside, guanine arabinoside, hypoxanthine arabinoside, 6-mercaptopurineriboside, theoguanosine riboside, nebularine, 5-iodouridine, 5-iododeoxyuridine, 5-bromodeoxyuridine, 5-vinyldeoxyuridine, 9-[(2-hydroxy)ethoxy]methylguanine (acyclovir), 9-[(2-hydroxy-1-hydroxymethyl)-ethoxy]methylguanine (DHPG), azauridien, azacytidine, azidothymidine, dideoxyadenosine, dideoxycytidine, dideoxyinosine, dideoxyguanosine, dideoxythymidine, 3′-deoxyadenosine, 3′-deoxycytidine, 3′-deoxyinosine, 3′-deoxyguanosine, 3′-deoxythymidine), prodrug activating antibodies are produced by bacterial expression, and those able to supply thymidine to otherwise thymidine-deficient bacteria are selected. Thymidine bears a close structural resemblance to fluorouridine and the other nucleoside analogues listed above; therefore, a catalytic antibody able to release fluorouridine (or any of the other nucleoside analogues listed above) from a prodrug is able to release thymidine from the equivalent substrate in which fluorouridine (or any other nucleoside analogue of interest) has been replaced by thymidine. This is illustrated below for a fluorouridine-based prodrug. Thymidine-deficient bacteria are applied with substrate thymidine derivatized by the same promoiety as the fluorouridine prodrug; colonies producing a catalytic antibody able to cleave the pronutrient can utilize released thymidine and therefore survive. Antibody from these surviving colonies is then screened for cleavage of the prodrug to give fluorouridine.  
      Blocking thymidine production is a potent method of arresting bacterial cell growth. Thymidine is essential for DNA synthesis, and it is obtained only by enzymatic methylation of deoxyuridine. As the base thymine is not found in RNA, there is no possibility of supplementing the thymidine pool by degradation of RNA blocking the conversion of deoxyuridine to thymidine rapidly shuts down DNA synthesis. Therefore, one way of blocking thymidine synthesis is to inhibit the enzymes thymidylate synthetase or dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR). Fluorodeoxyuridylate is an irreversible inhibitor of thymidylate synthetase, but it also gives rise to synthesis of defective RNA, so that antibody-mediated release of thymidine may not be sufficient to prevent cell death. Methotrexate is a highly specific inhibitor of DHFR; however, tetrahydrofolate, the product of the enzymatic reduction, is also required for the biosynthesis of purines and certain amino acids. Nevertheless, the purine pool is maintained by supplementing the growth medium with hypoxanthine so that the methotrexate-treated bacteria would then have a unique requirement for thymidine. (Another folate analogue, trimethoprim, is an even more potent inhibitor of bacterial DHFR than methotrexate, and is used if necessary; Gilman, A. G., et al.,  The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics  (1985):1263-1268).  
      An alternative way of selecting for cleavage of thymidine-based prodrug is to use a strain of  E. Coli  deficient in thymidylate synthetase (Neihardt, F. C.,  Escherichia coli and Salmonella typhimurium: Cellular and Molecular Biology  (1987). Use of a strain in which expression of the enzyme is temperature sensitive allows all the colonies initially to be grown with the enzyme fully expressed. Raising the temperature then shuts down enzyme expression, and only those colonies producing an antibody able to cleave the thymidine-based prodrug are able to survive.  
      C. Screening of Catalytic Activation Of Cyclophosphamide Prodrug Immobilization and Screening of Catalytic Monoclonal Antibodies  
      Immobilization: Immobilization is carried out as described in Section A. Alternatively, screening is carried out with antibody free in solution.  
      Screening Antibodies for Catalytic Activity: To antibody in solution or immobilized washed antibody, a solution of the prodrug in the appropriate assay buffer is added. Following incubation at 25° C. for a time dependent on the uncatalyzed rate of prodrug activation, formation of activated drug is measured. The substrate solution is either removed from the solution to determine the extent of product formation or the product is measured in situ.  
      Detection of prodrug activation is carried out by colorometric or fluorometric determination of a byproduct that accompanies prodrug activation—acrolein.  
      One of a number of possible acrolein detection methods is employed. Some potentially sensitive and specific detection methods follow:  
      1. Detection of Acrolein Using Enzymes that Catalyze Reactions of Acrolein.  
      a) One enzyme that can be used to detect acrolein formation is alcohol dehydrogenase (E.C. 1.1.1.1) Alcohol dehydrogenase is commercially available (Sigma Chemical Company) and catalyzes the following reaction (where, for example, the aldehyde is acetaldehyde and the alcohol is ethanol);  
      aldehyde+NADH (colored)+H+ alcohol+NAD+(no color)  
      The oxidation of NADH to NAD +  is accompanied by a color change centered at 340 nm. This color change is a commonly used with this enzyme to monitor its activity. The compound, acrolein, will be accepted as the aldehyde substrate by alcohol dehydrogenase since it closely resembles acetaldehyde, and the enzyme is not particularly strict with the exact structure of its substrates. There are different types of alcohol dehydrogenase commercially available from different species (yeast and equine, for example) and the enzymes from different species differ somewhat in their substrate specifities so that if the enzyme from one species does not oxidize acrolein, another may.  
      b) The reaction catalyzed by aldehyde dehydrogenase (E.C. 1.12.1.5), also commercially available from Sigma Chemical Company, is similar in that aldehyde substrates are accepted and a color change occurs with the reaction. In this reaction, the aldehyde is oxidized to a carboxylic acid (acetaldehyde to acetic acid, for example); 
 
aldehyde+NAD+(no color) acid+NADH (color)+H+
 
      In this case a disappearance of color at 340 nm will accompany the transformation of substrate since NAD +  is converted to NADH, rather than the other way around as with alcohol dehydrogenase.  
      c) A third possible enzyme-coupled detection method employs both alcohol oxidase (E.C. 1.1.3.13) and peroxidase (E.C. 1.11.1.7). Alcohol oxidase can convert an aldehyde to a carboxylic acid using molecular oxygen and creating hydrogen peroxide; 
 
aldehyde+O 2    acid+H 2 O 2  
 
      Alcohol oxidase is commercially available (Sigma Chemical Company) and on the basis of published literature will accept acrolein as a substrate (Guibault, G. G.,  Handbook Of Enzymatic Methods Of Analysis  (1976):244-248, New York: Marcel Dekker). The formation of hydrogen peroxide by alcohol oxidase is monitored by adding peroxidase (Sigma Chemical Company) to the reaction mixture along with the chromophoric peroxidase substrate, o-dianisidine. Peroxidase will catalyze the following reaction; 
 
H 2 O 2 +o-dianisidine H 20+“colored product”
 
      The colored product is spectrophotometrically observable at 456 nm.  
      2. Detection of Catalysis Using Fluorescent or Chromophoric Aldehyde-Reactive Reagents.  
      In this type of detection method, acrolein is non-catalytically reacted with commercially available aldehyde-reactive reagents (from, for example, Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, Oreg., USA) to yield a colored or fluorescent derivative. The product of the reaction with acrolein is isolated by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) or by thin layer chromatography (TLC) and detected by absorbance or by fluorescence by standard means.  
      One potential reagent is dansyl hydrazine (Molecular Probes, Inc.).  
                 
 
      Dansyl hydrazine reacts under mild conditions with aldehydes to give a fluorescent product (Eggert, F. M., et al.,  J. Chromatogr.  333 (1985):123; Avigad, G.,  J. Chromatogr.  139 (1977):343) that is detectable at low concentrations upon TLC or HPLC of the reaction mixture.  
      Other reagents that are more useful than dansyl hydrazine because of lower detection limits, greater reaction specificity, or milder reaction conditions are other fluorescent hydrazides that are commercially available such as coumarin hydrazide, fluorescein thiosemicarbazide (Molecular Probes, Inc.). These reagents are compared to see which best suits the specific requirements.  
      D. Screening for Antibody Catalyzed Liberation of Doxorubicin from Prodrugs  
      1. Background. Doxorubicin prodrug activation can be detected in either of two basic ways; in vitro detection by observing the inherent physical changes that accompany the chemical transformation of prodrug to active drug, or in vivo detection by biological screening for the toxic effects of the activated drug.  
      2. Screening. Screening of antibodies in monoclonal cell line supernatants using the immobization method described in Section A or of antibodies purified from ascites is done by standard methods of either thin layer chromatography (TLC) or high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). Typically, the reaction mixture contains 200 micromolar prodrug, approximately 1 micromolar antibody, 140 mM sodium chloride, and is buffered at pH 7.4 in 10 mM HEPES buffer. Changes in component concentrations and in pH are also tested. Typical alternative pH values are pH 5.0 in which MES buffer replaces HEPES, and pH 9.0 in which Tris buffer replaces HEPES. The temperature is typically at 25° C. but is raised if the background (uncatalyzed) hydrolysis of the prodrug is not dramatically increased at higher temperatures.  
      Doxorubicin, its prodrug forms, and the cleaved inactivating pro moiety can all be detected by absorbance or fluorescence. Doxorubicin, and presumably the doxorubicin prodrug both absorb strongly in ultraviolet and visible light (Absorption max (methanol): 233, 252, 288, 479, 496, 529 nm). The aromatic inactivating pro moiety absorbs strongly in the ultraviolet at 260-280 nm as well as 220 nm.  
      Observation of antibody-catalyzed prodrug activation by TLC is carried out with either purified antibodies or, using the 96-well plate early screening detection method described herein, with impure antibodies in cell culture supernant. TLC of doxorubicin prodrug activation is carried out by standard methods resulting from separation of drug and prodrug on the TLC plate. When the doxorubicin prodrug is hydrolyzed to form free doxorubicin, a primary amino group is exposed on the drug. With proper choice of TLC matrix and solvent systems, separation of pro form from active drug is readily accomplished. Detection of TLC-separated drug and prodrug is either visible inspection of orange-red color or by the natural fluorescence of doxorubicin using an ultraviolet-emitting light. Also, when prodrug activation occurs, a free carboxyl group is formed in the leaving aromatic pro moiety which gives this newly formed compound properties that allow separation by TLC from both prodrug and doxrubicin.  
      Screening of active drug formation is also carried out by HPLC under standard conditions. Visible and ultraviolet detection of prodrug depletion or drug or pro moiety formation is used with an on-line absorbance or fluorescence detector. Prodrug, drug, and liberated pro moiety is separated on a reverse phase column using common solvent systems which is optimized for best separation. Conditions that are optimized are; type of reverse phase column, solvent flow rate, solvent mixture components, and elution profile (isocratic elution or gradient elution).  
      3. Selection. Doxorubicin is a general cytotoxin that is toxic to both bacterial and mammalian cells. Screening for the biological effects of antibody-liberated doxorubicin permits identification of cell lines (bacterial or hybridoma) producing large amounts of catalytically active prodrug-activating antibody. If the prodrug is not cytotoxic, only those cell lines producing prodrug-activating antibody are killed by the prodrug. This idea is analogous to that delineated herein for biological selection of cell lines by screening for increased resistance to β-lactam antibiotics and by ability of catalytic antibody cell lines deficient in thymidine synthetase to produce thymidine by prodrug cleavage. In the case of doxorubicin prodrugs, screening differs in that selection is for cell death by suicide caused by prodrug activation (rather than for catalytic antibody-conferred enhanced survival abilities). Thus, in the case of biological screening for doxorubicin production, an aliquot of each cell line is kept aside and not used in the screening so that the catalytic antibody producing cell lines is not lost during selection. In practice, a series of colonies of monoclonal cells (hybridoma or bacterial) producing antibody are exposed to serial dilutions of the prodrug. Those cell lines that show increased susceptibility to death in a dose-dependent manner are studied further; those antibodies are isolated and further characterized in a pure state. Alternatively, instead of serial dilutions of prodrug administered to a series of colonies of the same cell line, a single dose of prodrug is administered in a concentration calculated to bring about death by an arbitrarily-decided minimally satisfactory kinetic rate of antibody catalysis in the time of the experiment.  
      E. Screening Of Antibodies For Catalytic Activation Of Melphalan Prodrugs  
      Antibodies are either screened at an early stage in hybridoma supernatants by the 96 well plate immobilization technique (described in Section A) or at later stage from mouse ascites. In either case catalysis can be detected by normal methods of HPLC separation of substrates and products. The substrate (prodrug) and products (drug and pro moiety) are all aromatic and can be detected at low levels using a UV detector online with the HPLC apparatus. In the case of the early screen, aliquots from the wells following a suitable incubation time with antibody are withdrawn and injected into the HPLC. Likewise with antibody from ascites, reaction aliquots are injected onto the HPLC and separation of substrate and products as well as detection and quantitation are carried out.  
      Formulation and Administration  
      The present invention also encompasses pharmaceutical compositions, combinations and methods for treating cancers and other tumors. More particularly, the invention includes combinations comprising immunoconjugates (targeting protein and catalytic protein, or targeting antibody and catalytic antibody (bispecific antibodies) and the corresponding prodrug or prodrugs for use in a method for treating tumors wherein a mamalian host is treated in a pharmaceutically acceptable manner with a pharmaceutically effective amount of a targeting protein catalytic protein conjugate or conjugates or bispecific antibody or antibodies and a pharmaceutically effective amount of a prodrug or prodrugs. The combination and methods of this invention are useful in treating humans and animals.  
      In an advantageous embodiment, the immunoconjugate is administered prior to the introduction of the prodrug into the host. Sufficient time is then allowed between administration of the immunoconjugate and the prodrug to allow the targeting protein of the immunoconjugate to target and localize at the tumor site. Such sufficient time may range from 4 hours to one week depending upon the conjugate used. The period of time between the end of administration of the immunoconjugate and the beginning of administration of prodrug varies depending on the site to be targeted and the nature of the immunoconjugate and prodrug, together with other factors such as the age and condition of patient. More than one administration of prodrug may be necessary to achieve the desired therapeutic effect. Thus, the exact regime will usually need to be determined empirically, with the aim of achieving a maximal concentration of immunoconjugate at the target site and a minimal concentration elsewhere in patient, before the prodrug is administered. In this way, an optimum selective therapeutic effect can be achieved.  
      The immunoconjugate is administered by any suitable route, preferably parenterally, e.g., by injection or infusion. These compounds are administered using conventional modes of administration including, but not limited to, intravenous, intraperitioneal, oral, intralymphatic, or administration directly into the tumor. Intravenous administration is particularly advantageous.  
      The compositions of the invention—comprising the immunoconjugates or prodrugs—may be in a variety of dosage forms which include, but are not limited to, liquid solutions or suspensions, tablets, pills, powders, suppositories, polymeric microcapsules or microvesicles, liposomes, and injectable or infusible solutions. The preferred form depends upon the mode of administration and the therapeutic application. For example, oral administration of the antibody-enzyme conjugate or bispecific antibody may be disfavored because the conjugate proteins tend to be degraded in the stomach if taken orally, e.g., in tablet form.  
      Suitable formulations of the immunoconjugate or prodrug for parenteral administration include suspensions, solutions or emulsions of each component in oily or aqueous vehicles and optionally contain formulatory agents such as suspending, establishing and/or dispersing agents. Alternatively, the immunoconjugate or prodrug is in powder form for reconstituting with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water before use. If desired, the immunoconjugate antibody and/or prodrug is presented in unit dosage form. Formulations are conveniently prepared in isotonic saline for injection.  
      The most effective mode of administration and dosage regimen for the compositions of this invention depends upon the severity and course of the disease, the patient&#39;s health and response to treatment and the judgement of the treating physician. Accordingly, the dosages of the immunoconjugates and prodrugs should be titrated to the individual patient.  
      Nevertheless, an effective dose of the immunoconjugate of this invention is in the range of from about 1.0 to about 100 mg/m 2 . An effective dose of the prodrug of the invention will depend upon the particular prodrug used and the parent drug from which it is derived. The precise doses at which the immunoconjugate and prodrug will be administered will depend on the route of administration, body weight, and pathology of the patient, the nature of the prodrug, and the catalytic properties of the immunoconjugate. Since the prodrug is less cytotoxic than the parent drug, dosages in excess of those recognized in the art for the parent drug may be used.  
      The prodrug is administered at doses in general use for the administration of the drug itself but will preferably be administered at lower doses, for example, or around 0.001 to 0.5 times the normally administered dose of drug alone.  
      Another embodiment of this invention of this invention provides a method of combination chemotherapy using several prodrugs and only a single antibody-enzyme conjugate. According to this embodiment, a number of prodrugs are used that are all substrates for the same enzyme or catalytic antibody in an immunoconjugate. Thus, a particular antibody-enzyme conjugate or bispecific antibody converts a number of prodrugs into cytotoxic form, resulting in increased antitumor activity at the tumor site.  
      Still another embodiment of this invention involves the use of a number of immunoconjugates wherein the specificity of the antibody varies, i.e., a number of immunconjugates are used, each one having an antibody that binds specifically to a different antigen on the tumor of interest. The enzyme component of these immunoconjugates is the same or may vary. This embodiment is especially useful in situations where the amounts of the various antigens on the surface of a tumor is unknown and one wants to be certain that sufficient enzyme is targeted to the tumor site. The use of a number of conjugates bearing different antigenic specificities for the tumor increases the likelihood of obtaining sufficient enzyme at the tumor site for conversion of a prodrug or series of prodrugs. Additionally, this embodiment is important for achieving a high degree of specificity for the tumor because the likelihood that normal tissue will possess all of the same tumor-associated antigens is small [cf., I. Hellstrom, et al., “Monoclonal Antibodies To Two Determinants Of Melanoma-Antigen p97 Act Synergistically In Complement-Dependent Cytotoxicity”,  J. Immunol.  127 (No. 1), (1981):157-160].  
      In some patients with multiple metastatic lesions, tumor imaging has proven difficult due to the heterogeneity of the tumor cells wherein only some of the cells express the targeted antigens. In such tumors, where intra or inter-tumor heterogeneity is known to exist, a cocktail of monoclonal antibodies recognizing different tumor antigens are used to activate the prodrug. This approach offers the potential of achieving a higher total concentration of drug at the tumor site in the cases where antigen heterogeneity exists (Wahl, R.,  Cancer Research. Suppl ., (1990):941s-948s).  
      The following examples are illustrative, but not limiting of the methods and compositions of the present invention. Other suitable modifications and adaptations of a variety of conditions and parameters normally encountered in clinical therapy which are obvious to those skilled in the art are within the spirit and scope of this invention.  
     EXAMPLES  
     Example 1a  
     Preparation of the Prodrugs, Linear Trimethylbenzoyl, Trimethoxybenzoyl-, Trimethoxybenzoyl-, and 5′-O-(2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, Compounds 1a, 1b, and 1c  
      5′-O-(2,4,6-Trimethylbenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1a. 5′-O-(3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1b and 5′-O-(2,6dimethylbenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1c. (For individual reference, compound numbers in bold in the following text refer to the compounds in the synthetic schemes shown in the figures.) Refer to  FIGS. 1   a  and  1   c  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      The preparation of 5′-O-(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1a and 5′-O-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1b was achieved with the reaction of 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-chloride and 3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl chloride with 2′,3′-O-isopropylidene-5-fluorouridine 65 (prepared in Example 16) in pyridine followed by acid hydrolysis with 50% formic acid at 65° C.  
      The preparation of 5′-O-(2,6 dimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1c was achieved by reaction of 2,6 dimethoxybenzoyl chloride and compound 65 in pyridine followed by acid hydrolysis using 50% formic acid at 65° C.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     5′-O-(2,4,6-Trimethylbenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1a  
      A mixture of 328 mg of 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoic acid and 3 mL of thionyl chloride was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The volatile components were evaporate in vacuo, the residue was redissolved in 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 , and the volatile components were again evaporated in vacuo to give 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl chloride.  
      Anhydrous pyridine (10 mL) was evaporated three times from 151 mg of 2′,3′-O-isopropylidene-5-flurorouridine, Compound 65 of Example 16. Pyridine (1 mL) was added to the residue, the mixture was cooled by an ice bath, and a solution of 456 mg of 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl chloride in 4 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  was added dropwise. One hour after the completion of addition, 1 mL of MeOH was added. After standing for 16 hours, the volatile components were evaporated in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (75 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO 3  (2×50 mL) and water (25 mL), dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , concentrated in vacuo, and purified by flash chromatography (50% ethyl acetate/hexane, R f  0.63) to give 142 mg of the product as a colorless solid,  1 H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) δ 1.27 (s, 3), 1.48 (s, 3), 2.18 (s, 6), 2.22 (s, 3), 4.30 (m, 1), 4.45 (m, 2), 4.81 (m, 1), 5.10 (dd, 1), 5.78 (d, 1), 6.87 (s, 2), 8.05 (d, 1), 11.97 (d, 1).  
      A mixture of 440 mg of the above acetonide in 6 mL of 50% formic acid was heated at 65° C. for 2 hours. The volatile components were evaporated in vauco. The residue (408 mg) had:  1 H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) δ 2.13 (s, 6), 2.19 (s, 3), 3.92 (m, 1), 4.05 (m, 2), 4.44 (m, 2), 5.72 (d, 1), 6.83 (s, 2), 7.81 (d, 1), 11.82 (bs, 1).  
      The residue was purified by reverse phase HPLC on a C18 column eluted with 40% CH 3 CN/H 2 O to give 260 mg of the product, Compound 1a, as a colorless solid.  
     5′-O-(3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1b  
      0.604 g of 2′,3′-isopropylidene-5-fluorouridine, Compound 65 of Example 16, was, after azeotropic removal of moisture from pyridine, dissolved in 4 mL of dry pyridine and cooled to 0° C. A solution of 0.92 g of 3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl chloride in 4 mL of dichloromethane was added dropwise over 1 hour period at 0° C. After stirring for a further 1 hour at 0° C., the resulting mixture was quenched by the addition of 7.5 mL of methanol. The mixture was evaporated to a syrup, redissolved in ethyl acetate (75 mL) and washed with saturated sodium hydrogen carbonate (2×75 mL) and water (50 mL). The crude mixture was then purified by flash chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexane to give 0.30 g of 5′-O-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl)-2′,3′-isopropylidene-5-fluorouridine:  1 H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) δ 1.32 (s, 3), 1.52 (s, 3), 3.73 (s, 3), 3.85 (s, 6), 4.40 (m, 1), 4.53 (m, 2), 4.94 (m, 1), 5.09 (m, 1), 5.77 (d, 1), 7.22 (s, 2), 8.01 (d, 1), 11.90 d, 1).  
      0.30 g of 5′-O-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl)-2′,3′-isopropylidene-5-fluorouridine was dissolved in 4.2 mL of 50% aqueous formic acid and was heated with stirring at 65° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and was then purified by flash chromatography using ethyl acetate to give 0.15 g of 5′-O-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 1b:  1 H NMR (CD 3 CN) δ 3.81 (s, 3), 3.86 (s, 6), 4.15-4.28 (m, 3), 4.53 (dd, 1), 4.63 (dd, 1), 5.75 (d, 1), 7.30 (s, 2), 7.59 (d, 1).  
      5′-O-(2,6 dimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, 1c: To a solution of compound 65 (0.45 g, 1.5 mmol) in pyridine (3 mL) at 0° C. under an argon atmosphere, a solution of 2,6 dimethoxybenzoyl chloride (0.4 g, 4 mmol) in methylene chloride (2 mL) was added dropwise through a syringe and the resulting mixture was stirred at that temperature for 4 hours. After completion of the reaction, methanol (3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and solvents were removed in vacuo. The resulting material was dissolved in ethyl acetate (75 mL) and washed with a saturated solution of sodium bicarbonate (2×20 mL) in water (20 mL). The organic layer was separated, dried, concentrated, and flash chromatoghaphed to afford the coupled compound as an oily material (0.66 g, 95%, Rf, 0.46, silica, methylene chloride, methanol, hexane, 80, 1, 19).  
       1 H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ): 8.98 (bs, 1H), 7.56 (d, 1H), 7.32 (m, 1H), 6.56 (d, 2H), 5.92 (m, 1H), 4.82 (m, 2H), 4.72 (m, 1H), 4.62 (m, 2H), 4.40 (m, 1H), 3.80 (s, 6H), 1.61 (s, 3H), 1.40 (s, 3H).  
      A solution of above compound (0.47 g, 1 mmol) in formic acid (50%, 6 mL) was heated at 65° C. with stirring under an argon atmosphere for 2 hours. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed in vacuo and the resulting material was purified by reverse phase HPLC to afford the compound 1c (0.27 g, 65%).  
       1 H NMR: 7.82 (d, 1H), 7.38 (1, 1H), 6.62 (d, 2H), 5.80 (d, 1H), 4.52 (dd, 2H), 4.16 (m, 3H), 3.86 (s, 6H).  
     Example 1b  
     Preparation of the Hapten for Prodrug 1b in Example 1a, the Linear Phosphonate of Trimethoxybenzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 4  
      Refer to  FIG. 1   b  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      Uridine was iodinated at the 5 position to give iodide 3a (Robins, J. M., et al.,  Can. J. Chem.  60 (1982):554-557). The hydroxyl groups were protected to give iodide 3c. 3-Butyne-1-ol was transformed in four steps to alkyne 3d. Alkyne 3d and iodide 3c are coupled using a Pd(II) catalyst to give nucleoside analog 3e (Robins, J. J., et al.,  J. Org. Chem.  48 (1983):1854-1862). Selective deprotection gives alcohol 3f.  
      Dibenzyl 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenylphosphonate 2 can be prepared from the reaction of 3,4,5-trimethoxybromobenzene with dibenzyl phosphite at high temperature in the presence of tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0), triethylamine and toluene following the procedure of  J. Med. Chem.  32 (1989):1580-1590. Reaction of diester 2 with 1 equivalent of PCl 5  gives monochloridate 2a, which is reacted with alcohol 3f to give diester 3g. Reduction and basic hydrolysis gives hapten 4, which can be linked to a carrier protein via the primary amino group.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      5-Iodouridine 3a  
      5-Iodouridine was prepared following the procedure of Robin, M. J., et al.,  Can J. Chem.  60 (1980):554-557, incorporated herein by reference.  
     5′-O-tert-Butyldimethylsilyl-5-iodouridine 3b  
      Imidazole (216 mg) was added to a mixture of triol 3a (490 mg) and tert-butyldimethylchlorosilane (239 mg) in 1 mL of DMF cooled by an ice bath. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. After 16 hours, the mixture was poured into 0.1 M HCl (25 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL), the aqueous phases were washed with water, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash chromatography (7% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ) gave 460 mg of the product as a colorless solid:  1 H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) δ 0.08-0.12 (m, 6), 0.90 (s, 9), 3.72 (dd, 1), 3.80 (dd, 1), 3.90 (bs, 2), 4.02-3.98 (m, 1), 5.76 (d, 1), 7.93 (s, 1), 11.74 (bs, 1).  
     5′-O-tert-Butyldimethylsilyl-2′,3′-O-3-N-tris(4-methylbenzoyl)-5-iodouridine 3c  
      Anhydrous pyridine (3×15 mL) was evaporated in vacuo from 450 mg of diol 3b. The residue was dissolved in 15 mL of pyridine, and 650 μL of triethylamine followed by 612 μL of 4-toluoyl chloride were added. The mixture was heated at 50° C. for 5 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, and an additional 410 μL of triethylamine and 390 mL of 4-toluoyl chloride were added. Heating was continued for 16 hours, and then the volatile components were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in chloroform (50 mL), washed with 1M HCl (3×50 mL) and water (2×50 mL), concentrated in vacuo, and purified by flash chromatography (30% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 534 mg of the product as a colorless solid.  
       1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ 0.33 (s, 6), 1.07 (s, 9), 2.35 (s, 3), 2.38 (s, 3), 2.41 (s, 3), 4.06 (bs, 2), 4.47 (bs, 1), 5.58 (dd, 1), 5.73 (d, 1), 6.57 (d, 1), 7.13 (d, 2), 7.15-7.25 (m, 4), 7.79 (d, 4), 7.90 (d, 2), 8.34 (s, 1).  
     4-(4-Toluenesulfonyloxy)-1-butyne  
      Triethylamine (12.2 mL) was added dropwise to a mixture of 3-butyn-1-ol (5.09 g) and 4-toluenesulfonyl chloride (16.95 g) in 50 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled by an ice bath. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. After 21 hours, the mixture was poured into ethyl acetate (150 mL) and washed with 0.1M HCl (75 mL), saturated NaHCO 3  (75 mL), and brine (75 mL) and the organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash chromatography (10% ethyl acetate/hexane) gave 16.57 g of the product as a colorless solid.  
      IR (neat) 3293, 3067, 2963, 2925, 2125, 1734, 1599, 1496, 1465, 1360, 1308, 1293, 1246, 1190, 1176, 1098, 1021, 982, 906, 817, 769, 665 cm −1 ,  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ 1.93 (t, 1), 2.41 (s, 3), 2.52 (dt, 2), 4.06 (t, 2), 7.32-7.28 (m, 2), 7.79-7.75 (m, 2).  
     N-(3-Butynyl)phthalimide  
      Potassium phythalimide (2.56 g) was added to a mixture of the above tosylate (1.34 g) in 20 mL of DMF. The mixture was heated at 50° C. for 6 hours. The mixture was cooled and partitioned between ethyl acetate (2×100 mL) and 1M HCl (25 mL) and the organic phases were dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash chromatography (15% ethyl acetate/hexane) gave 1.1 g of the product as a colorless solid.  
      IR (KBr) 3459, 3253, 1767, 1703, 1469, 1429, 1402, 1371, 1337, 1249, 1210, 1191, 1116, 1088, 996, 868, 795, 726 cm −1 ;  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ 1.96 (t, 1, J=2.7), 2.62 (dt, 2, J=2.7, 7.1), 3.88 (t, 2, J=7.0), 7.74-7.71 (m, 2), 7.87-7.84 (m, 2);  13 C NMR (CDCl 3 ) 18.31, 36.49, 70.23, 80.23, 123.33, 131.94, 134.01, 167.98.  
     4-Benzyloxycarbonylamino-1-butyne 3d  
      Hydrazine hydrate (268 μL) was added to a mixture of the above phthalimide (1.1 g) in 20 mL ethanol, and the mixture was heated at reflux for 1.5 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, and the gummy precipitate was dispersed by adding 1M HCl, and then a colorless solid precipitate formed.  
      The ethanol was evaporated in vacuo, and the solid was filtered out and washed with water. The aqueous phase was lyophilized to give 0.93 g of a colorless solid.  
       1 H NMR (CD 3 OD) δ 2.52 (t, 1, J=2.7), 2.59 (dt, 2, J=2.7, 6.8), 3.08 (t, 2, J=6.7);  13 C NMR (CD 3 OD) δ 17.99,39.57, 73.11, 79.44.  
      The solid was dissolved in 40 mL of 50% MeOH/water, and 766 μl of triethylamine was added. A solution of benzyloxycarbonyl succinimide (1.82 g) in 10 mL of MeOH was then added. After 1.5 hours, an additional 1 g of benzyloxycarbonyl succinimide was added and the pH was maintained above 9 by adding triethylamine. After an additional 1.5 hours, the pH was adjusted to 5 by adding 1M HCl. The volatile components were removed in vacuo, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (2.5% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ) to give 0.82 g of the product.  
      IR (neat) 3416, 3299, 3066, 3034, 2949, 2119, 1703, 1526, 1455, 1367, 1333, 1251, 1216, 1141, 1073, 1021, 1001, 913, 824, 777, 753, 739, 698, 645 cm −1 ;  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ 2.00 (t, 1, J=2.5), 2.41 (dt, 2, J=2.3, 6.2), 3.37 (q, 2, J=6.3), 5.12 (s, 2), 7.32-7.38 (m, 5);  13 C NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ 19.77, 39.61, 66.71, 70.00, 128.05, 128.38, 128.44, 136.33, 156.16.  
      5′-O-tert-Butyldimethylsilyl-2′,3′-O-3-N-tris(4-methylbenzoyl)-5-(4-N-carbobenzoyloxyaminobutynyl) uridine 3e: A solution of Iodo compound 3c (10 g, 12 mmol), alkyne 3d (4.8 g, 2 eq), (Ph 3 P) 2 PdCl 2  (200 mg) and CuI (200 mg) in triethylamine (60 mL, deoxygenated) was heated at 50° C. for overnight. After completion of the reaction solvent was removed in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in chloroform and washed with disodium ethyldiaminetetraacetic acid (5%, 2×30 mL), dried, concentrated and the product was purified by flash chromatography to give compound 3e as an oil (8 g, 73%, R f  0.26, ether and methylene chloride 4:96).  
       1 H NMR: 8.20 (s, 1H), 7.90 (d, 2H), 7.80 (t, 4H), 7.38 (m, 5H), 7.22 (t, 4H), 7.12 (d, 2H), 6.60 (d, 1H), 5.72 (d, 1H), 5.69 (t, 1H), 5.40 (t, 1H, NH), 5.16 (bs, 2H), 4.42 (s, 1H), 4.06 (s, 3H), 3.41 (m, 2H), 2.62 (t, 2H), 2.42 (s, 3H), 2.40 (s, 3H), 2.36 (s, 3H), 1.02 (s, 9H), 0.62 (s, 6H).  
      Preparation of Hydroxy compound 3f: To a solution of silyl compound 3e (0.91 g, 1 mmol) in THF (5 mL), a solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride (1M, 1.2 mL) was added at 0° C. under an argon atmosphere and stirred for 2 hours. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed in vacuo and the product was purified by flash chromatography to afford hydroxy compound 3f.  
      (0.64 g, 80%, Rf, 0.41, ethyl acetate, hexane 1:1).  
       1 H NMR: 8.46 (s, 1H), 7.32 (m, 6H), 7.32 (m, 6H), 6.40 (d, 1H), 5.82 (m, 2H), 5.32 (bs, 1H), 5.16 (bs, 2H), 4.42 (s, 1H), 3.98 (AB q, 2H), 3.42 (m, 2H), 3.20 (m, 2H), 2.60 (m, 2H), 2.42 (s, 3H), 2.40 (s, 3H), 2.36 (s, 3H).  
     Dibenzyl 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenylphosphonate 2  
      3,4,5-Trimethoxybromobenzene is prepared from 3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoic acid following the procedure of  Tetrahedron Lett.  26 (1985):5939-5942. Dibenzyl phosphite is heated in the presence of tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (0), triethylamine and toluene with 3,4,5-trimethoxybromobenzene to give dibenzyl 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenylphosphonate 2 following the procedure of  J. Med. Chem.  32 (1989):1580-1590.  
     Benzyl 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenylphosphonochloridate 2a  
      Phosphorous pentachloride (1.15 mmol) is added to a mixture of diester 2 (1 mmol) in 5 mL of CHCl 3 . The mixture is heated at 60° C. until  1 H NMR of an aliquot shows that no starting material remains (approximately 4 hours). The mixture is cooled to room temperature, and the volatile components are removed in vacuo overnight.  
      Phosphonate Ester 3g  
      A solution of chloridate 2a (1 mmol) in 4 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to a solution of alcohol 3f (1 mmol) and DMAP (1.5 mmol) in 4 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  at room temperature. When the starting material is consumed as observed by TLC, the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The product is purified by flash chromatography.  
     5-(4-Aminobutyl)-5′-O-(3,4,5-trimethoxyphenylphosphonyl)uridine 4  
      A mixture of nucleoside derivative 3g (1 mmol) and 5% Pd—C (10 weight %) in 10 mL of methanol is stirred at room temperature under an atmosphere of hydrogen until uptake of hydrogen is complete. The catalyst is removed by filtration through a pad of Celite, washing with methanol. The filtrate is cooled by an ice bath and anhydrous ammonia is bubbled through the solution for 20 minutes. The volatile components are removed in vacuo, and the product is purified by reverse phase HPLC.  
     Example 1c  
     Preparation of the Hapten for Prodrug 1a in Example 1a, the Linear Phosphonate of Trimethylbenzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 4a  
      Refer to  FIG. 1   d  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      The intermediate phosphochloridate 2d was prepared starting from bromomesitylene in four steps. Bromomesitylene was treated with n-butyllithium in THF followed by addition of diethylphosphochloridate which afforded phosphonate compound 2b. Compound 2b, on treatment with trimethylsilyl iodide followed by treatment with dilute HCl afforded the corresponding dihydroxy compound 2c. Compound 2c, on treatment with PCl 5  in chloroform at 50° C. afforded the phosphochloridate 2d. Compound 3f was coupled with phosphochloridate 2d in methylene chloride in the presence of DMAP to afford coupled compound 3h. Compound 3h was hydrogenated using Pd—C in ethyl acetate to afford the debenzylated compound which on treatment with aqueous ammonia afforded the hapten 4a.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Diethyl 2,4,6 trimethylphenyl Phosphonate 2b: To a solution of 2-bromomesitylene (4 g, 20 mmol) in dry THF (100 mL), a solution of n-butyl lithium (1.6 M, 16 mL) was added dropwise through a syringe under an argon atmosphere at −78° C. and stirred for 1 hour. After 1 hour, a solution of phosphochloridate (4.12 g, 1.2 eq) in THF (10 mL) was added and stirred for 1 hour. After completion of the reaction, ammonium chloride solution (10%, 20 mL) was added to the mixture and stirred for 30 minutes. The organic phase was separated, dried, concentrated, and the product was purified by flash chromatography to afford the phosphate 2b as an oil (1.75 g, 34%, Rf, 0.34, ethyl acetate, hexane, 1:3).  
       1 H NMR: 7.42 (m, 10H), 6.92 (d, 2H), 4.16 (m, 4H), 2.62 (s, 6H), 2.32 (s, 3H), 1.32 (t, 6H).  
      Benzyl 2,4,6 trimethylphenyl hydroxy Phosphonate 2c: A solution of diethylphosphate 2b (1.5 g, 5.8 mmol) and trimethylsilyl iodide (2.4 g, 12 mmol) in methylene chloride (15 mL) was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour. After completion of the reaction, a solution of sodiumthiosulphate (5%, 5 mL) was added and stirred for 15 minutes. The organic phase was separated, dried and concentrated to give an oily compound. The obtained compound was dissolved in THF (5 mL) and stirred with dil. HCl (5%, 5 mL) for 1 hour. The organic phase was separated, dried, and concentrated to give the hydroxy compound as an oil (1 g, 85%).  
       1 H NMR: 11.00 (bs, 2H), 7.62 (d, 2H), 3.32 (s, 6H), 2.96 (s, 3H).  
      A solution of dihydroxy compound (1 g, 5 mmol), benzylalcohol (1.6 g, 3 eq) and trichloroacetonitrile (4.3 g, 6 eq) in pyridine (15 mL) was heated at 75° C. overnight under an argon atmosphere. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed in vacuo and the product was purified by flash chromatography to afford the monobenzylated compound 2c as an oil (0.72 g, 50%, Rf, 0.36, methanol, methylene chloride, 1:9).  
       1 H NMR: 12.20 (bs, 1H), 7.32 (m, 5H), 6.92 (d, 2H), 5.06 (d, 2H), 2.64 (s, 6H), 2.32 (s, 3H).  
      Benzyl 2,4,6 trimethylphenyl Phosphonochloridate 2d: A solution of hydroxy compound 2c (0.58 g, 2 mmol) PCl 5  (0.56 g, 2 mmol) in chloroform (10 mL) was heated at 50° C. for 2 hours. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed and the compound was dried in vacuo.  
       1 H NMR: 7.42 (m, 5H), 6.92 (d, 2H), 5.42 (m, 2H), 2.72 (s, 6H), 2.42 (s, 3H).  
      Compound 3h: To a solution of hydroxy compound 3f (300 mg, 0.38 mmol), DMAP (61 mg, 0.5 mmol) in methylene chloride (3 mL), a solution of phosphochloridate 2d (151 mg, 1.3 eq) in methylene chloride was added through a syringe under an argon atmosphere. After completion of the reaction solvent was removed in vacuo and purification by flash chromatography afforded 3h (138 mg, 33%, Rf, 0.42, methylene chloride, ethyl acetate, hexane, 3, 3, 4).  
       1 H NMR: 7.82 (m, 4H), 7.20 (18H), 6.42 (t, 2H), 6.18 (t, 1H, NH), 5.72 9m, 1H), 5.42 (m, 1H), 5.02 (m, 5H), 4.24 (m, 3H), 3.42 (m, 4H), 2.62-2.40 (singlets of Me, 18H).  
      5-(4-Aminobutyl)-5′-O-(2,4,6 trimethylphenylphosphonoyl)uridine 4a: A suspension of compound 3h (156 mg, 0.14 mmol) in ethyl acetate (2 mL) was stirred in the presence of Pd—C (10%, 15 mg) under hydrogen atmosphere for 2 hours. After completion of the reaction, catalyst was removed by filtration and removal of the solvent afforded the hydrogenated compound (70 mg, 56%).  
      A solution of this hydrogenated compound (70 mg, 0.08 mmol), ammonium hydroxide (5 mL) in methanol (4 mL) was heated in a sealed tube for overnight. After completion of the reaction solvents were removed in vacuo and the product was purified by reverse phase HPLC acetonitrile (1) and water (99) to afford pure compound 4a as a colorless solid (14 mg, 37%).  
       1 H NMR: 7.92 (s, 1H), 6.92 (d, 2H), 6.02 (d, 1H), 4.32 (t, 1H), 4.18 (m, 1H), 4.08 (m, 1H), 3.92 (m, 1H), 3.53 (m, 1H), 3.00 (m, 2H), 2.62 (s, 6H), 2.22 (s, 3H), 2.42 (m, 2H).  
     Example 2a  
     Preparation of Prodrug, Intramolecular Trimethoxybenzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 10  
      Refer to  FIG. 2   a  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example. The bromobenzoic acid 5, whose preparation is described in Example 8a, undergoes lithium-halogen exchange and is alkylated with protected iodoethanol 7 (see  FIG. 2   a ). The product 8 is dehydrated to form the symmetric anhydride, which is reacted with 5-fluorouridine to form a stable prodrug precursor, 9. The protecting group of the precursor can be removed rapidly to give the prodrug 10.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     2-Bromoethyl 4,4′-dimethoxytriphenylmethyl Ether 6  
      DMAP (100 mmol) is added to a solution of 2-bromoethanol (100 mmol) and 4,4′-dimethoxytiphenylmethyl chloride (100 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) at room temperature. After 16 hours, the mixture is poured into water (300 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The organic phases are washed with water (100 mL), dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
     4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl 2-Iodoethyl Ether 7  
      A solution of bromide 6 (10 mmol) and NaI (10 mmol) in 100 mL of acetone is heated at reflux with the exclusion of light for 2 hours. The resulting mixture is cooled to room temperature, the solid is removed by filtration, and the solvent is evaporated from the filtrate in vacuo. The resulting yellow oil is used without further purification.  
     2-[2-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethoxy)ethyl]-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoic Acid 8  
      tert-Butyllithium (1.7 M solution in n-pentane, 15 mmol) is added to a solution of bromide 5 (5 mmol) in 50 mL of THF, while maintaining the temperature of the mixture below −95° C. After the addition is completed, the mixture is allowed to warm to −78° C. After 30 minutes, iodide 7 is added in one portion, and the mixture is allowed to warm to 0° C. Water (50 mL) is added, and then the pH of the mixture is carefully adjusted to 3 using 0.1 M HCl. The mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The organic phases are dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     5′-O-{2-[2-(4,4′-Dimethoxtriphenylmethoxy)ethyl]-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl}-5-fluorouridine 9  
      A solution of DCC (2.5 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to a solution of acid 8 (5 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  at room temperature. After 1 hour, the solid is removed from the mixture by filtration, the solid is washed with 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 , and a mixture of 5-fluorouridine (2.5 mmol), and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (0.25 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to the combined organic phases. When the reaction is completed as observed by TLC, the mixture is concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the mixture by flash chromatography gives the product as a colorless solid.  
     5′-O-[2-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl]-5-fluorouridine 10  
      Ether 9 (0.1 mmol) is added in one portion to 80% aqueous acetic acid (10 mL) at room temperature. After 15 minutes, the mixture is poured into saturated NaHCO 3  (100 mL) and extracted with ether (3×100 mL). The combined organic phases are washed with 100 mL portions of 5% NaHCO 3  until no further gas evolution is apparent. The organic phases are then washed with brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product.  
     Example 2b  
     Preparation of the Hapten of Prodrug in Example 2a: The Cyclic Phosphonate of Trimethoxybenzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 15  
      Refer to  FIG. 2   b  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      The cyclic phosphonate 13 is synthesized following a typical strategy: bromination, lithiation, hydroxyalkylation, and cyclization of an aryl phosphonate 11. Saponification of the phosphonate ester, chlorination, and reaction with 2′,3′-O-isopropylidene-5-fluorouridine 65 followed by acid hydrolysis with 50% formic acid at 65° C. gives the hapten 15.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     Diethyl 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenylphosphonate 11  
      Compound 11 is synthesized following the procedure for Compound 2, using diethylphosphite.  
     Diethyl 2-bromo-3,4,5-Trimethoxyphenylphosphonate 12  
      A solution of bromine (10 mmol) in 10 mL of acetic acid is added dropwise to a solution of ester 11 (10 mmol) in 10 mL of acetic acid cooled by an ice water bath. After the red color of the resulting mixture is discharged, the mixture is poured into saturated NaHCO 3  (100 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The combined organic phases are washed with 100 mL portions of 5% NaHCO 3  until no further gas evolution is apparent. The organic phases are then washed with brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a pale yellow solid.  
     Ethyl 2,3-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzo)butylphostonate 13  
      tert-Butyllithium (1.7 M solution in n-pentane, 10 mmol) is added to a solution of bromide 12 (5 mmol) in 50 mL of THF, while maintaining the temperature of the mixture below −95′ C. After the addition is completed, the mixture is allowed to warm to −78° C. After 30 minutes, ethylene sulfonate (5 mmol) is added in one portion, and the mixture is allowed to warm to room temperature. After 1 hour, 1 M HCl (50 mL) is added. After an additional 1 hour, the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     2,3-(3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzo)butylphostonic Acid 14  
      A solution of ester 13 (5 mmol) in 50 mL of methanol at room temperature is maintained at pH 12 with 1 M NaOH until the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC. The pH is then adjusted to 2 with 1 M HCl and the methanol is evaporated in vacuo. The aqueous mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL), and the organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      5′-O-[2,3-(3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzo)butylphostonyl]-5-fluorouridine 15  
      Thionyl chloride (5 mmol) is added to a solution of acid 14 (5 mmol) in 50 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled by an ice water bath. After 1 hour, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is taken up in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and added to a solution of 2′,3′-O-isopropylidene-5-fluorouridine 65 (5 mmol) and triethylamine (15 mmol) in 25 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled by an ice water bath. After 4 hours, the mixture is poured into 0.1 M HCl (50 mL), the phases are separated, and the aqueous phase is extracted with ethyl acetate (2×50 mL). The combined organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the isopropylidene protected intermediate which on treatment with 50% aqueous formic acid (10 mL) at 65° C. for 2 hours and concentration in vacuo yields 5′-O-[2,3-(3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzo)-butylphostonyl]-5-fluorouridine 15.  
     Example 3  
     Preparation of Prodrug, Galactosyl Cytosine b-D-arabinofuranoside, Compound 19  
      Refer to  FIG. 3  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      Cytosine β-D-arabinofuranoside was first perbenzoylated and then O-debenzoylated with benzoyl chloride and sodium hydroxide, respectively, to give N 4 -benzoyl ara-C 16. Subsequent coupling with β-galactose pentacetate in the presence of trimethylsilyl trifluoromethanesulfonate in acetonitrile yielded the partially protected compound 17. Acetylation with acetic anhydride and DMAP in dichloromethane afforded the fully protected compound 18, which on complete deprotection using ammonia in methanol at 50° C. gave the final product, β-gal ara-C 19.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     N 4 -Benzoylcytosine-β-D-arabinofuranoside 16  
      A suspension of 1.22 g (5.02 mmol) of cytosine-β-D-arabinofuranoside in 50 mL of dry pyridine was cooled to 0° C. 10 mL of benzoyl chloride was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was poured into 75 mL of 5% aq sodium bicarbonate solution and extracted with CH 2 CL 2  (2×150 mL). The organic phases were washed with water (50 mL), dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture was dissolved in 50 mL of pyridine/methanol/water (5:3:2 v/v) and cooled in an ice bath. To this solution was added cold 50 mL of 2M sodium hydroxide in pyridine/methanol/water (5:3:2 v/v). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 15 minutes and then the pH was adjusted to 7 with the addition of ammonium chloride. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and 20 mL of methanol was added. The mixture was filtered and the solid washed with more methanol (3×20 mL). All washings and filtrate were collected, combined, and concentrated in vacuo. Redissolved in 50 mL of methanol/CH 2 Cl 2  (2:8 v/v) and the mixture was purified by flash chromatography using methanol/CH 2 Cl 2  (1:9-2:8 v/v). A second flash chromatography as described above was needed to remove all impurities to give 1.5 g (86%) of N 4 -Benzoylcytosine-β-D-arabinofuranoside 16.  
       1 H NMR (D 2 O+DMSO-d 6 , 2:8 v/v) d 8.2 (1H, d, J 5,6  7 Hz, H-6), 7.95 (2H, d, J=7 Hz, o-Ph proton×2), 7.75-7.35 (4H, m, H-5 and Ph proton×3), 6.1 (1H, d, J 1′,2′  4 Hz, H-1′), 4.2-3.9 (3H, m, H-2′, H-3′ and H-4′), and 3.68 (2H, d, J 4′,5 , 4 Hz, H-5′).  
      Coupling Reaction: Preparation of Compound 17  
      To a solution of galactose penta acetate (1.17 g, 3 mmol) and compound 16 (2 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (5 mL), a solution of trimethylsilyl trifluromethane sulfonate (TMS tf, 354 mg, 1.5 mmol) in dry acetonitrile (2.5 mL) was added through a syringe under argon atmosphere for 2 minutes. Then the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and TLC analysis indicated the disappearance of the starting material with the formation of two new compounds (TLC, Ethyl acetate). Then the reaction mixture was quenched with aq. sodium bicarbonate and extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL). Organic layer was separated, dried, and concentrated to give the colorless solid containing mixture of compounds. The mixture was subjected to flash chromatography to afford Compound 17 (0.8 g, 59% and Rf, 0.36 10% methanol in chloroform).  
       1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ): 9.60 (bs, 1H, NH), 8.16 (d, 1H), 7.86-7.42 (m, 6H aromatic and 1H heterocyclic), 6.20 (d, 1H), 5.32 (m, 3H, CHO of acetate), 4.62 (d, 1H, J=7.6 Hz, anomeric), 4.20-3.78 (m, 8H) 3.20 (bs, 1H), 2.62 (bs, 1H, 2×OH, exchanged with D 2 O), 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.04 (s, 6H), 2.01 (s, 3H, all CH 3  of acetates).  
      Compound 17 was peracetylated by using acetic anhydride DMAP in methylene chloride to give the compound 18 (Rf, 0.28, Ethyl acetate twice run, 86%). The product was purified by flash chromatography.  
       1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ): 8.18 (d, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 7.82-7.42 (m, 6H, aromatic, 1H heterocyclic), 6.42 (d, 1H, J=5.1 Hz), 5.62-5.08 (m, 5H, OCH of acetate), 4.60 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz, anomeric), 4.28-3.82 (m, 6H, OCH), 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.14 (s, 3H), 2.10 (s, 6H), 2.06 (s, 3H), 2.00 (s, 3H, all are CH 3  of acetates).  
      A solution of compound 18 (0.5 g; 0.6 mmol) in methanol (5 ml) and NH 4 OH solution (5 ml) was heated at 50° C. for 16 hours. TLC analysis indicated the completion of the reaction. Solvents were removed in vacuo and the crude product was subject to medium pressure reverse phase C 18  chromatography using 2% methanol in water as solvents to afford β-gal-Ara-C as a pure colorless solid (0.22 g; 92%).  
       1 H NMR (D 2 O): 7.80 (d, 1H), 6.22 (d, 1H), 6.02 (d, 1H), 4.48 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz, anomeric), 4.40 (t, 1H), 4.24 (m, 2H), 3.92 (m, 2H), 3.80-3.60 (m, 6H).  
     Example 4  
     Preparation of Prodrug Galactosyl 5-Flurouridine, Compound 24.  
      Refer to  FIG. 4  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      The synthesis of β-gal 5-fluorouridine 24 follows a similar strategy. 5-Fluorouridine was treated with t-butyl dimethylchlorosilane in the prescence of imidazole in DMF at 0° C. to give the partially protected compound 20. Subsequent reaction with acetic anhydride in the prescence of DMAP and triethylamine gave the fully protected nucleoside 21. Deprotection of the silyl group was achieved using p toluene sulphonic acid at 0° C., and the resultant product 22 was coupled with β-galactose pentacetate in the presence of trimethylsilyl trifluoromethanesulfonate in acetonitrile to give the fully protected compound 23. Complete deprotection with ammonia in methanol at 50° C. afforded the final product, β-gal 5-fluorouridine 24.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Preparation of Compound 21: To a cooled solution of 5-Flurouridine (1.31 g, 5 mmol) in DMF sequentially added imidazole (0.816 g, 12 mmol) and t-butyldimethylchlorosilane (0.90 g, 6 mmol) and contents were stirred at 0° C. for 2 hours. After completion of the reaction (TLC, 10% Methanol in chloroform) contents were transferred into a separating funnel containing ethyl acetate (100 mL), washed with water (3 times, 25 mL each) and organic layer was separated, dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated to give monosilylated product 20 as an oily compound (Rf, 0.44, 10% methanol in chloroform).  
      The above obtained product 20 (1.80 g, crude, 5 mmol) was dissolved in methylene chloride (20 mL) and added sequentially DMAP (1.34 g, II mmol) and acetic anhydride (1.22 g, 12 mmol) and reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours. TLC analysis (1:1 Ethyl acetate:Hexane) indicated the completion of reaction. Then the reaction mixture was transferred into a separating funnel and washed with water, dried, concentrated and the product was purified by flash chromatography to afford compound 21 in pure form (Rf, 0.48, 1:1 EtOAc and Hexane, 1.90 g, 83%).  
       1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ); 8.02 (d, 1H), 6.26 (d, 1H), 5.34 (m, 2H, CH0 of acetate), 4.22 (m, 1H), 3.86 (AB q, 2H), 2.08, 2.04, (2×s, 3H, each, CH 3  of acetate), 0.92 (s, 9H, t-bu si), 0.12 (s, 6H, CH 3  of silyl).  
       13 C HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 169.99, 169.72, 157.06, 156.71, 149.61, 142.51, 139.35, 85.46, 84.12, 73.25, 71.94, 63.28, 25.74, 20.70, 20.68, 20.37, 18.37, −5.70.  
      Preparation of Compound 22: To a cooled solution (0° C.) of compound 21 (1.69 g, 3.5 mmol) in methanol (6 mL) and methylene chloride (12 mL), catalytic amount of PITSA (100 mg) was added and reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes. After completion of reaction (TLC) it was quenched with triethylamine (0.5 mL) and removed the solvents to give crude compound 22 as an oil. It was then chromatographed to give compound 22 in pure form (Rf, 0.22, 1:1 EtOAc and Hexane, 920 mg 76%).  
       1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ): 8.09 (d, 1H J=6.3 Hz), 6.14 (d, 1H), 5.43 (m 2H, CHO of acetate), 4.21 (m, 1H), 3.86 (AB q, 2H), 2.08, 2.04 (2×s, 3H each, CH 3  of acetate).  
       13 C HNMR (CDCl 3 ): 170.34, 170.08, 157.56, 149.55, 139.17, 86.61, 83.72, 73.21, 71.48, 61.65, 20.65, 20.38.  
      Preparation of coupling compound 23: Coupling reaction between galactose penta acetate and compound 22 was accomplished by the method as mentioned above to give coupling product 23 (Rf, 0.20, 1:1 EtOAC: Hexane, 59%).  
       1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ): 9.60 (bs, 1H, NH), 8.18 (d, 1H, J=6.6 Hz), 6.34 (m, 1H), 5.46-5.08 (m, 5H, OCH of acetates), 4.61 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz, anomeric), 4.30-3.72 (m, 6H), 2.16, 2.13, 2.11, 2.09, 2.05, 2.01 (6×s, each 3H, CH 3  of acetate).  
       13 C HNMR: 170.37, 170.10, 169.34, 157.00, 156.64, 149.43, 142.52, 139.37, 100.44, 85.83, 82.35, 73.35, 71.63, 70.35, 70.34, 68.57, 68.11, 66.74, 61.13, 20.34, 20.07, 20.29.  
      Preparation of Prodrug β-D-Gal Fluorouridine 24: Compound 23 was converted to prodrug, compound 24 via the same method (ammonia) as described above (92%).  
       1 H NMR (D 2 O): 8.12 (d, 1H), 5.88 (d, 1H), 4.44 (d, 1H, J=7 Hz anomeric), 4.36-3.62 (m, 11H).  
     Example 5a  
     Preparation of the Precursor to the Hapten of the Prodrugs in Examples 3 and 4, Compound 25  
      Refer to  FIG. 5   a  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      The aminonucleoside 25 is prepared from 5-fluorouridine according to Scheme in  FIG. 5   a . Compound 22 ( FIG. 4 ) is activated with triphenylphosphine and carbontetrabromide, and is then subsequently treated with sodium azide to form an azide intermediate. This intermediate is then hydrogenated with 10% Pd—C to an amine which is then deprotected with sodium methoxide in methanol to give the aminonucleoside 25. This aminonucleoside is used in subsequent coupling reactions to give the amidine compound 30b (R=5-fluorouridine).  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     Preparation Of 5′-Amino-5-fluororidine 25  
      To a solution of 5′-hydroxy 2′, 3′ diacetoxy-5-fluorouridine 22 (1 eq) in methylene chloride (0.2 M) are added sequentially triphenyl phosphine (1.1 eq), and carbon tetrabromide (1.2 eq) and the mixture is stirred at 0° C. After completion of the reaction the product is ready for the next step.  
      The crude bromide compound (1 eq) is then dissolved in DMF (0.2 M) and heated with sodium azide (3 eq) at 60′. After the completion of the reaction, the reaction mixture is transferred to a separating funnel containing ethyl acetate. The solution is washed with water and the organic layer is separated, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product is purified by flash chromatography to give the azide derivative which is the precursor of compound 25.  
      The azide derivative is dissolved is ethyl acetate and 10′ palladium on activated carbon (0.05 eq) is added. To this stirred suspension an atmosphere of hydrogen is placed using a balloon filled with hydrogen gas. After completion of the reaction, the catalyst is removed by filtering through a bed of celite and the filtrate is collected and concentrated to give the corresponding amino precursor of compound 25.  
      The amino precursor is dissolved in methanol and sodium methoxide (0.05 eq) is added. The solution is stirred at room temperature and at the completion of the reaction glacial acetic acid (0.05 eq) is added and the mixture is concentrated in vacuo. Compound 25 is purified by medium pressure reverse phase C 18  chromatography using methanol in water as solvent.  
     Example 5b  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrugs in Examples 3 and 4, Compounds 30a and 30b  
      Refer to  FIGS. 5   b  and  5   c  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      The preparation of the amidine Compound 30a and/or 30b (R=ara C or 5-fluorouridine) can be accomplished by two different synthetic routes. One synthetic route starts with the commercially available diacetone D glucose ( FIG. 5   b , described here in Example 5b) whilst the other starts from glucospyranose ( FIG. 5   c , described here in Example 5c).  
      Starting from diacetone D glucose, the first step involves silylation of the hydroxy group with t-butyl dimethylchlorosilane in the prescence of imidazole in DMF. Subsequent treatment with aqueous acetic acid affords the 5,6 diol which is then silylated at the primary hydroxy position with t-butyl dimethylchlorosilane and the remaining secondary hydroxy group is converted to a mesylate on treatment with MsCl in the prescence of triethylamine. The resultant mesylate compound 26 is then converted to the azide compound 27 by first reacting it with sodium iodide in acetone and then treating the iodide derivative with sodium azide in DMF. Hydrolysis of the acetonide group is accomplished by treating compound 27 with aqueous acetic acid at 60° C. The resultant diol is then oxidised at the anomeric position with bromine in aqueous dioxane to give a lactone derivative which is subsequently silylated with t-butyldimethylchlorosilane to give the lactone compound 28. The azide group of compound 28 is converted to an amino group when subjected to hydrogenation using 10% Pd on carbon, and as a result, rearranges to a glucolactam 29a derivative. Inversion of the secondary hydroxy group using the Mitsunobu reaction procedure gives the galactolactam 29b derivative. Activation with Meerweins reagent and subsequent coupling with the amino nucleoside 25 (Example 5a) followed by desilylation with fluoride gives the final amidine compound 30b (R=5-fluorouridine).  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Preparation of Compound 26  
      To a mixture of diacetone D-glucose (5.2 g, 20 mmol) in dry DMF (50 ml), sequentially added imidazole (3.26 g, 48 mmol) t-butyl dimethylchlorosilane (3.60 g, 24 mmol) and contents are stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. After completion of the reaction, the reaction mixture is transferred to a separatory funnel containing ethyl acetate (250 mL) and washed with water, dried, concentrated and product is purified by flash chromatography.  
      The silylated compound (6.73 g, 17.9 mmol) obtained is dissolved in THF (50 mL) and stirred with aq acetic acid (6 mL) for 6 hours. After completion of the reaction (TLC) solvent was removed and the product is purified by flash chromatography.  
      The above obtained diol (5.38 g, 16.1 mmol) is dissolved in dry DMF (60 mL) and sequentially added imidazole (2.62 g, 2.4 eq) and tbutyl dimethylchlorosilane (1.2 Eq) and stirred at 0° C. for 2 hours. After completion of the reaction, it is dissolved in ethyl acetate (200 mL) and washed with water, dried, concentrated and the product is purified by chromatography.  
      The monosilylated hydroxy compound (5.6 g, 12.5 mmol) is dissolved in methylene chloride (40 mL) and cooled to 0° C. and sequentially added triethylamine (2.7 mL) and MsCl (1.85 g, 1.3 eq) and contents are stirred at 0° C. for 3 hours. After completion of the reaction, it is transferred into a separatory funnel and washed with water, dried, and concentrated to give the corresponding mesylate compound 26.  
      Preparation of Azide 27: A mixture of mesylate 26 (5.26 g, 10 mmol), sodium iodide (1.93 g, 13 mmol) in acetone (50 mL) is heated at reflux for 4 hours. After completion of the reaction, solvent is removed and the resulting material is dissolved in ethyl acetate (100 mL) and washed with water, dried, and the product is purified by chromatography.  
      A mixture of iodide (4.54 g, 8 mmol), sodium azide (1.30 g, 20 mmol) in dry DMF was heated at 60° C. for 6 hours. After completion of the reaction, it is diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL) and washed with water, dried and concentrated. The product is purified by chromatography to obtain azide 27 as a pure compound.  
      Preparation of Lactone 28: The obtained azide 27 (2.89 g, 6 mmol) is dissolved in THF (30 mL) and aq acetic acid (10 mL) and contents are heated at 60° C. for 6 hours. After completion of the reaction solvent is removed and the resulting material is dissolved in ethyl acetate dried and concentrated to give the diol.  
      A bromine (1 eq) solution in dioxane was added to the above obtained diol (1.77 g, 4 mmol) in aq dioxane (10%, 20 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. After completion of reaction, it is diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL) and washed with aq sodium thiosulfate, dried and concentrated to give hydroxy lactone.  
      The hydroxyl group in the above lactone is protected as t-butyldimethyl silyl ether as described previously to obtain the lactone 28.  
      Preparation of Lactam 29a: A suspension of azide 28 (1.10 g, 2 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) and Pd—C (101%, 110 mg) is hydrogenated using hydrogen balloon for 4 hours. After completion of reaction, catalyst was filtered through celite and solvent is removed to give lactam 29a.  
      Preparation of Lactam having Galacto Configuration 29b: The above obtained lactam 29a was converted to the galacto lactam 29b as mentioned below. To a solution of lactam 29a (0.86 g, 1.6 mmol) and acetic acid (2 mL) in methylene chloride (8 mL) are added sequentially triphenyl phosphine (0.419 g, 1.6 mmol) and diethyl azodicarboxylate (0.295 g 1.7 mmol) at 0° C. and the reaction mixture is stirred for 2 hours. After completion of reaction the solvent is removed and the product is isolated by chromatography. The obtained acetate is hydrolysed by sodium methoxide to obtain the galacto lactam 29b.  
      A mixture of galactolactam 29b (1 eq), Meerweins reagent (triethyloxonium tetrafluoroborate, 1 M solution in dichloromethane, 1.2 eq) in dichloromethane is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The aminonucleoside 25 (1 eq) is then added and when the reaction is complete, the product is purified by flash chromatography.  
     Example 5c  
     The alternative Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrugs in Examples 3 and 4, Compounds 30a and 30b  
      Refer to  FIG. 5   c  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      Preparation of the galactose-β-5-fluorouridine amidine using 5-fluorouridine starts with commercially available glucopyranose 31. Treatment with 2,2 dimethoxypropane in acetone in the presence of catalytic amount of p toluenesufonic acid gives the protected compound 32. Further protection of the remaining hydroxy groups with t-butyldimethylchlorosilane affords the fully protected compound 33. Heating to reflux with benzyl alcohol opens the lactone and the resultant hydroxy compound 34 is mesylated with MsCl. Subsequent conversion to the azide compound 35 is achieved in two steps by first reacting the mesylate group with sodium iodide in acetone and then displacing the iodide group with an azide group using sodium azide in DMF. Hydrogenation using 10% Pd on carbon converts the azide group to an amino which then cyclises to a lactam. Deprotection of the acetonide to a diol on treatment with trifluoroacetic acid and subsequent protection of the primary alcohol with t-butyl dimethylchlorosilane yields the glucolactam compound 29a. The secondary hydroxy group is inverted using the Mitsunobu reaction procedure and the subsequent activation and coupling of the amide is accomplished using Meerweins reagent and the aminonucleside 25 (Example 5a) respectively. Final deprotection using fluoride yields the amidine compound 30b (R 2 =5-fluorouridine).  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Preparation of Lactone 32: A mixture of hydroxy compound 31 (8.90 g, 50 mmol), 2, 2 dimethoxy propane (4 eq) and PTSA (0.5 g) in methylene chloride (400 mL) and acetone (100 mL) is stirred for 4 hours. After completion of the reaction, it is quenched with triethylamine (3 mL) and the solvent is removed and resulting crude compound is purified by chromatography to obtain compound 32.  
      Preparation of Silyl Compound 33: A mixture of compound 32 (8.72 g, 40 mmol), imidazole (4.4 eq) and t-butyl dimethylchlorosilane (2.2 eq) in dry DMF is stirred for 6 hours. After completion of the reaction, it is diluted with ethyl acetate (500 mL), and washed with water (100 mL×2), dried concentrated and the product is isolated by chromatography to obtain compound 33.  
      Preparation of Compound 34: A solution of compound 33 (13.38 g, 30 mmol) in a mixture of Benzyl alcohol (100 mL) and chloroform (300 mL) is heated at 60° C. until the reaction is completed. After completion of the reaction, solvents are removed and the product is isolated by chromatography to give compound 34. When methanol is used it gives the corresponding hydroxy methyl ester.  
      Preparation of Azido Ester 35: Conversion of hydroxy compound 34 to azido compound 35 is achieved by the same sequence of reactions as used for the preparation of hydroxy compound 26 to compound 27, to obtain azido compound 35.  
      Preparation of Lactam 29a and Lactam 29b: Hydrogenation of Compound 35 (under previously described conditions) and deprotection using trifluoroacetic acid (vide supra) and primary alcoholic protection gives 29a. Lactam 29a is inverted to galacto lactam 29b using Mitsunobu reaction condition (vide supra).  
      Conversion of compound 29a to amidine compound 30b can be accomplished using the same procedure described previously (vide supra).  
     Example 6  
     Preparation of the Prodrug, Aliphatic Diethyl Acetal Protected Aldophosphamide, Compound 38  
      Refer to  FIG. 6  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      When bis(2-chloroethyl)amine hydrochloride was heated with an excess of phosphorus oxychloride, the dichlorophosphamide 36 was obtained after distillation as a crystalline solid in good yield. Reaction of the dichlorophosphamide 36 with one molar equivalent of 3-hydroxypropionaldehyde diethyl acetal gave monochlorophosphamide 37 which on treatment with ammonia afforded 3,3-diethoxypropionyl N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)phosphoric diamide 38.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     N,N-Bis(2-chloroethyl)phosphoramidic Dichloride 36  
      A mixture of bis(2-chloroethyl)amine hydrochloride (5 g) and POCl 3  (13 mL) was heated at reflux for 12 hours, during which the mixture became a homogeneous solution. The excess POCl 3  was removed by distillation (bp 105° C.), and then 4.93 g of the product was distilled (bp 110-114° C., 0.1 mm Hg). Recrystalliztion from acetone/hexane gave 4.5 g of the product as a colorless solid: mp 54.5-56° C. (lit. 54-56° C., Friedman, O. M., et. al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  76 (1954):655-658);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ 3.62-3.68 (m, 2), 3.71-3.77 (m, 6).  
     3,3-Diethoxypropionyl N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)Phosphoramidic Chloride 37  
      A solution of dichloridate 36 (1.75 g) in 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  was added dropwise to a mixture of 3,3-diethoxy-1-propanol (1.0 g) and DMAP (0.91 g) in 10 mL of CH 2 CO 2 . After 19 hours, a precipitate was formed. The precipitate was removed by filtration, and the volatile components were removed in vacuo. The residue was passed through a short column of silica gel, eluting with 25% and then 30% ethyl acetate/hexane, to give 0.95 g of the product: R f  0.38 (25% ethyl acetate/hexane);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ 1.23 (t, 6), 2.06 (q, 2), 3.40-3.60 (m, 6), 3.62-3.75 (m, 6), 4.21-4.38 (m, 2), 4.62 (t, 1).  
     3,3-Diethoxypropionyl N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)phosphoric Diamide 38  
      Anhydrous ammonia was bubbled through a solution of chloridate 37 (0.95 g) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  for 20 minutes, resulting in the formation of a precipitate. The solid was removed by filtration, and the volatile components were removed in vacuo to give 0.71 g of an oil. A portion (100 mg) of the crude product was passed through a short column of silica gel, eluting with 3% Et 3 N in 50% ethyl acetate/hexane, to give 46 mg of the product as a colorless oil: R f  0.16 (3% Et 3 N in 30% ethyl acetate/hexane); IR (CDCl 3 ) 3600-3100, 2976, 2932, 2849, 1573, 1446, 1376, 1348, 1225, 1132, 1056, 985, 752, 657 cm −1 ;  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) δ 1.20 (t, 6), 1.95 (q, 2), 3.34-3.75 (m, 12), 4.00-4.15 (m, 2), 4.63 (t, 1).  
      Stability of Acetal 38  
      A sample of acetal 38 was dissolved in 0.9 weight % NaCl in D 2 O at room temperature. No change in the  1 H NMR spectrum was observable after 2 days.  
     Example 7  
     Preparation of the Guanyl Hapten of the Prodrug, Aliphatic Diethyl Acetal Protected Aldophosphamide, Compound 43  
      Refer to  FIG. 7  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example. N-t-Boc-aminoethylphosphonic acid 39 is prepared by the reaction of 2-aminophosphonic acid with di-tert-butyl dicarbonate. Subsequent reaction with bis(2-chloroethyl)amine hydrochloride in the presence of triethylamine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride affords the phosphoramidic acid 40. Conversion to the phosphoric diamide 41 is achieved by first activating with 1-(2-mesitylenesulfonyl)-3-nitro-1,2,4-triazole and then reacting with ammonia. Deprotection with trifluoroacetic acid gives 42, which reacts with N,N-diethyl-O-methylisourea tetrafluoroborate to yield the final guanidinium product 43.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     N-t-Boc-2-aminoethylphosphonic Acid 39  
      1.25 g of 2-aminoethylphosphonic acid and 4.2 mL of triethylamine are dissolved in 10 mL of water and a solution of 2.62 g of di-tert-butyl dicarbonate in 10 mL of dry acetonitrile is added. The pH is kept at 9 by addition of triethylamine. After the addition is complete, the mixture is stirred for 2 hours and then concentrated in vacuo. The residue is redissolved in 0.01 M NaHCO 3  (100 mL) and washed with ethyl acetate (2×50 mL). The aqueous phase is adjusted to pH 1 by addition of 0.1 M HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate (2×1100 mL). The organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo to give N-t-Boc-2-aminoethylphosphonic acid 39.  
     N,N-Bis(2-chloroethyl)-P-[N′-(t-Boc)-2-aminoethyl]phosphonamidic Acid 40  
      A mixture of 2.25 g of N-t-Boc-2-aminoethylphosphonic acid 39, 2.14 g of bis(2-chloroethyl)amine hydrochloride, 4.2 mL of triethylamine and 0.146 g of 4-dimethylaminopyridine are dissolved in 20 mL of DMF/CH 2 Cl 2  (1:1 v/v). 2.3 g of 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride is added and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture is poured into 1 M NaOAc, pH 5 (75 mL) and washed with ether (2×75 mL). The aqueous phase to pH 1 with 1 M HCl and immediately extracted with ethyl acetate (2×100 mL). The organic phases are washed with water (20 mL), dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-P-[N′-(t-Boc)-2-aminoethyl]phosphonamidic acid 40.  
     N,N-Bis(2-chloroethyl)-P-[N′-(t-Boc)-2-aminoethyl]phosphonic Diamide 41  
      1.75 g of N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-P-[N′-(t-Boc)-2-aminoethyl]phosphonamidic acid 40 is dissolved in dry pyridine (50 mL) and concentrated in vacuo. This process is repeated once more with more pyridine (50 mL). The residue is dissolved in dry pyridine (25 mL) and 2.96 g of 1-(2-mesitylenesulfonyl)-3-nitro-1,2,4-triazole is added. Ammonia gas is bubbled through for 60 minutes. The reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo, redissolved in ethyl acetate (100 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO 3  (2×100 mL) and saturated NaCl (75 mL). The organic phase is dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , concentrated in vacuo and purified by flash chromatography to yield N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-P-[N′-(t-Boc)-2-aminoethyl]phosphonic diamide 41.  
     N,N-Bis(2-chloroethyl)-P-[2-(2,3-diethylguanidyl)ethyl]phosphonic Diamide 43  
      0.873 g of N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-P-[N′-(t-Boc)-2-aminoethyl]phosphonic diamide 41 is dissolved in 10 mL of dichloromethane and 10 mL of trifluoroacetic acid is added. After 60 minutes the reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo to give 42. The residue is redissolved in a mixture of 1 mL of triethylamine and 20 mL of water. The pH is adjusted to 8.5 with more triethylamine and 0.872 g of N,N′-diethyl-O-methylisourea tetrafluoroborate is added while keeping the pH at 8.5 with triethylamine. After 16 hours the reaction mixture is adjusted to pH 7 with acetic acid and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is redissolved in 5 mL of water and purified using reverse phase ODS chromatography to give N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-P-[2-(2,3-diethylguanidyl)ethyl]phosphonic diamide 43.  
     Example 8a  
     Preparation of the Anhydride Intermediate, Compound 45, for the Synthesis of Intramolecular Enol Trimethoxybenzoate Phosphamide Prodrug  
      Refer to  FIG. 8   a  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      Commercially available trimethoxybenzoic acid is brominated and the product 5 undergoes low temperature lithium-halogen exchange to produce the aryllithium intermediate. The reactive intermediate is alkylated by a protected iodoethanol 7, and the product 44 is dehydrated to form the symmetric anhydride 45.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     2-Bromo-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoic Acid 5  
      A solution of bromine (100 mmol) in 100 mL of acetic acid is added dropwise to a solution of 3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoic acid (100 mmol) in 100 mL of acetic acid cooled by an ice water bath. After the red color of the resulting mixture is discharged, the mixture is poured onto 500 g of crushed ice. The resulting solid is collected by filtration, dried over P 2 O 5  in vacuo, and recrystallized from Et 2 O to give the product as a pale yellow solid.  
     2-[2-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethoxy)ethyl]-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoic Acid (44)  
      tert-Butyllithium (1.7 M solution in n-pentane, 15 mmol) is added to a solution of bromide 5 (5 mmol) in 50 mL of THF, while maintaining the temperature of the mixture below −95° C. After the addition is completed, the mixture is allowed to warm to −78° C. After 30 minutes, iodide 7 (synthesis described in Example 2a) is added in one portion, and the mixture is allowed to warm to 0° C. Water (50 mL) is added, and then the pH of the mixture is carefully adjusted to 3 using 0.1 M HCl. The mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The organic phases are dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     2-[2-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethoxy)ethyl]-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoic Anhydride (45)  
      A solution of DCC (5.5 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to a solution of acid 44 (10 mmol) in 25 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  at room temperature. After 1 hour, the resulting solid is removed by filtration and washed with 25 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 , and the solvent is evaporated from the filtrate in vacuo. The product is used without further purification. This anhydride is used in Example 8b to synthesize the aldophosphamide prodrug compound 50  FIG. 8   b.    
     Example 8b  
     Preparation of the Prodrug, Intramolecular Enol Trimethoxybenzoate Phosphamide, Compound 50  
      Refer to  FIG. 8   b  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      The previously prepared symmetric anhydride 45 (Example 8a) is reacted with a β-siloxy propanal enolate to form the enol benzoate 48. The silyl protecting group is removed, and the alcohol thus revealed is reacted with a phosphoramide dichloridate followed by ammonia to form a relatively stable prodrug precursor 49. This precursor 49 can be rapidly transformed into the more reactive prodrug 50, as needed.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     3-(tert-Butyldimethylsiloxy)-1-propanol (46)  
      A mixture of 1,3-propanediol (10 mmol), tert-butyldimethylchlorosilane (11 mmol), and imidazole (22 mmol) dissolved in 5 mL of DMF was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was poured into 0.1 M HCl (100 mL) and extracted with ether (3×100 mL). The organic phases were washed with brine (100 mL, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture was purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     3-(tert-Butyldimethylsiloxy)propanal (47)  
      DMSO (24 mmol) is added to oxalyl chloride (11 mmol) in 40 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled to −78° C. After 15 minutes, alcohol 46 (10 mmol) is added. After an additional 15 minutes, triethylamine (50 mmol) is added. The mixture is allowed to warm to 0° C. and then poured into 0.1 M HCl (100 mL). The phases are separated, and the aqueous phase is extracted with ethyl acetate (2×100 mL). The organic phases are washed with water (100 mL), dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     3-tert-Butyldimethylsiloxyprop-1-enyl 2-[2-(4,4′-dimethoxytriphenylmethoxy)ethyl]-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoate (48)  
      NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 11 mmol) is washed with hexane (2×10 mL). Ether (20 mL) is added, followed by the dropwise addition of a solution of aldehyde 47 (10 mmol) in 20 mL of ether. Fifteen minutes after the addition is completed, a solution of anhydride 45 (20 mmol) in 20 mL of ether is added in one portion. After an additional 0.5 hour, the reaction mixture is poured into saturated NH 4 Cl (20 mL) and the phases are separated. The aqueous phase is extracted with ether (3×40 mL). The combined organic phases are extracted with brine (40 mL), dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     3-{2-[2-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethoxy)ethyl]-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyloxy}prop-2-enyl N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)phosphoric Diamide (49)  
      Tetrabutylammonium fluoride (1.0 M solution in THF, 2 mmol) is added to a solution of silyl ether 48 (2 mmol) in 50 mL of THF cooled to −23° C. After 5 minutes, triethylamine (2 mmol) is added, followed by 36 (2 mmol, synthesis described in Example 6). After an additional 3 hours, NH 3  is added. After a further 2 hours, the reaction mixture is poured into ice-cold brine and extracted with ether (4×100 mL). The combined organic phases are dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash chromatography gives the product as a colorless oil.  
     3-[2-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyloxy]prop-2-enyl N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)phosphoric Diamide (50)  
      Trityl ether 49 (0.1 mmol) is added in one portion to 80% aqueous acetic acid (10 mL) at room temperature. After 15 minutes, the mixture is poured into saturated NaHCO 3  (100 mL) and extracted with ether (3×100 mL). The combined organic phases are washed with 100 mL portions of 5% NaHCO 3  until no further gas evolution is apparent. The organic phases are then washed with brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as colorless solid.  
     Example 8c  
     Preparation of the Intramolecular Enol Trimethoxybenzoate Phosphamide Hapten, Compound 57  
      Refer to  FIG. 8   c  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      The protected aryl phosphite 51 is synthesized following literature precedent. The aromatic ring is brominated, the bromide 52 undergoes lithium-halogen exchange, and the aryllithium so produced is hydroxyethylated to give 53. After workup and deprotection, the cyclic phosphite 54 is obtained. The phosphite 54 undergoes the Perkow reaction with the α-bromo aldehyde 55 to produce the enol phosphonate 56. Deprotection and reaction with phosphorus oxychloride, followed by N-trifluoroacetylpiperazine and then ammonia gives the hapten 57, which can be linked to a carrier protein through the piperazine ring.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     Ethyl P-(3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl)-P-(diethoxymethyl)]hosphinate (51)  
      3,4,5-Trimethoxybromobenzene is prepared following the procedure of  Tetrahedron Lett.  26 (1985): 5939-5942 incorporated herein by reference. Ethyl (diethoxymethyl)phosphonite is prepared following the procedure of  Tetrahedron  45 (1989):3787-3808, incorporated herein by reference, and reacted with 3,4,5-trimethoxybromobenzene following the procedure of  J. Med. Chem.  32 (1989):1580-1590, incorporated herein by reference.  
     Ethyl P-(2-bromo-3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl)-P-(diethoxymethyl)phosphinate (52)  
      A solution of bromine (10 mmol) in 10 mL of acetic acid is added dropwise to a solution of ester 51 (10 mmol) in 10 mL of acetic acid cooled by an ice water bath. After the red color of the resulting mixture is discharged, the mixture is poured into saturated NaHCO 3  (100 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The combined organic phases are washed with 100 mL portions of 5% NaHCO 3  until no further gas evolution is apparent. The organic phases are then washed with brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a pale yellow solid.  
     P-Diethoxymethyl-2,3-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzo)butylphostinate (53)  
      tert-Butyllithium (1.7 M solution in n-pentane, 10 mmol) is added to a solution of bromide 52 (5 mmol) in 50 mL of THF, while maintaining the temperature of the mixture below −95′ C. After the addition is completed, the mixture is allowed to warm to −78° C. After 30 minutes, ethylene sulfonate (5 mmol) is added in one portion, and the mixture is allowed to warm to room temperature. After 1 hour, 1 M HCl (50 mL) is added. After an additional 1 hour, the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). The organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     2,3-(3,4,5-Trimethoxybenzo)butylphostinic Acid (54)  
      A mixture of compound 53 (5 mmol) in 20 mL of 36% aqueous HCl is heated at 100° C. for 2 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture is diluted with 200 mL of water and extracted with ethyl acetate (4×100 mL), and the organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     2-Bromo-3-tert-butyldimethylsiloxypropanal (55)  
      A mixture of CuBr 2  (10 mmol) and aldehyde 47 (10 mmol) in ethyl acetate (50 mL) and chloroform (50 mL) is heated at reflux for 6 hours with the exclusion of light The mixture is cooled to room temperature, the solid is removed by filtration and washed with ethyl acetate (50 mL), and the combined organic phases are dried over MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the mixture by flash chromatography gives the product as a pale yellow oil.  
     3-tert-Butyldimethylsiloxy-1-propenyl 2,3-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzo)butylphostonate (56)  
      Acid 54 (1 mmol) is dissolved in hexamethyldisilazane (1 mL) and heated at reflux for 3 hours. The mixture is cooled to room temperature and the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. Aldehyde 55 (1 mmol) is added to the resulting oil and the mixture is heated at 100° C. under a slow stream of nitrogen for 4 hours. After cooling, the mixture is purified by flash chromatography.  
     3-[P-amino-P-(N-piperazino)phosphoroxy]-1-propenyl 2,3-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzo)butylphostonate (57)  
      Tetrabutylammonium fluoride (1.0 M solution in THF, 2 mmol) is added to a solution of silyl ether 56 (2 mmol) in 50 mL of THF cooled to −23° C. After 5 minutes, triethylamine (2 mmol) is added, followed by POCl 3  (2 mmol). After 4 hours, a mixture of N-trifluoroacetylpiperazine (2 mmol) and triethylamine (2 mmol) is added in one portion. After an additional 3 hours, NH 3  is added. After a further 2 hours, the reaction mixture is poured into ice-cold brine and extracted with ether (4×100 mL). The combined organic phases are dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash chromatography gave the product as a colorless oil.  
     Example 9  
     Prodrug Activity of Galactosyl-Cytosine Arabinoside  
      The prodrug galactosyl-cytosine arabinoside (GalAraC) has been prepared as outlined in example 3 and has been tested in vitro and in vivo for toxicity and activation by the bacterial enzyme, β-glactosidase.  
      Different concentrations of the prodrug GalAraC were added to the two different tissue cultures cell lines, Colo 320 DM and Lovo. The cells were grown for four days after which the culture medium was removed and the cells were washed in PBS. After the cells were stained with Giemsa stain, the optical density of the stained cultures bound to the culture well surface was measured at 600 nm. The reduction of the optical density indicates a reduction of cell density adhering to the culture well. The same procedure was used to test the toxicity of AraC itself on the two cell lines. The comparison of the toxicity between prodrug and drug on the Colo 320 DM cell line is shown in  FIG. 9 . By comparing the concentration of prodrug and drug at the concentrations used to give an OD (600) of 0.5 it can be seen that the GalAraC is at least 800-fold less toxic than the AraC. That is, one must use 800-fold higher concentration of GalAraC to achieve the equivalent toxicity as AraC itself. Similar results can be seen in  FIG. 10  using the cell line Lovo where the prodrug is again at least 800 times less toxic than the drug AraC. Both  FIGS. 9 and 10  show that when the prodrug is activated by the enzyme β-galactosidase the toxicity is equivalent to that of the pure drug at the same concentration.  
      To test if the prodrug could be activated by β-glactosidase, the enzyme was conjugated to an antibody that was directed against Carcino Embryonic Antigen (CEA) a specific tumor antigen on the surface of the LoVo culture cells. The Colo 320 DM cells lack this surface antigen and were used as controls. The β-galactosidase conjugated antibody was added to the cultures and allowed to bind the antigen. The prodrug, at different concentrations, was then added to the cultures, which were then grown for three days. As controls, BSA without enzyme was added to the cultures and the same range of prodrug concentrations was added to the cultures.  FIG. 11  displays the results of this experiment which shows that the prodrug can be activated by the antibody-enzyme conjugate. By comparing  FIG. 1I  with  FIG. 12 , it is clear that the prodrug was not only activated by the conjugated antibody but also that the LoVo cells, carrying the CEA tumor marker are specifically killed when compared to the cultures where BSA was added with prodrug. The above results show that the prodrug is approximately 200-fold less toxic than the drug in an antigen localization experiment, and that it can be activated by a bacterial enzyme specifically at the surface of a tumor cell when bound by antibody at the cell surface.  
      To assess the ability of surface-bound conjugate to generate cytotoxic levels of active drug, the rate of product formation was measured using ONPG as a substrate. Conjugate specifically bound to LoVo cells was found to generate 1.2×10 7  molecules of product/min/cell. In our particular assay format, this rate is equivalent to 1.6 mM product formed per minute. Since 1.5 mM AraC is reported to inhibit cellular proliferation by 50% (Gish, D., et al.,  J. Med. Chem.  14 (1971):1159) the experimentally obtained rate appears to be sufficient to generate cytotoxicity in vitro assay.  
      Both AraC and GalAraC have been tested for toxicity and activation in the mouse. In separate experiments, mice were given (at a concentration of 100 mg/kg), AraC, GalAraC and GalAraC followed by β-galactosidase. After five days, a complete blood count was made on all the mice. By comparing the drug with the prodrug (see bars in  FIG. 13 ), it is clear that the prodrug is substantially less toxic than the drug in vivo. Similarly, the data in FIGS.  14  to  17  (the key in  FIG. 13  is the same for FIGS.  14  to  17 ) show that in the presence of β-galactosidase, the prodrug can be activated to create a toxicity much like the drug itself. This effect is quite pronounced in segmented neutrophils and is less so in red blood cells which probably reflects the different kinetics of cell synthesis in the different cell populations.  
      In summary, these data show that the prodrug, GalAraC, has a significantly reduced toxicity in vivo and in vitro and that when activated by an enzyme, the activated prodrug is released creating very simliar toxicity as AraC in vivo and in vitro.  
     Example 10  
     Prodrug Activity of Galactosyl-5-fluorouridine (24)  
      In a similar set of experiments the prodrug galactosyl-5-fluorouridine (Gal5FU) has been synthesized as described in Example 4 and tested as described above for GalAraC. The results of toxicity studies of the prodrug and the drug are shown in  FIG. 18 . It can be seen that there is over a 500-fold increase in the concentration of the prodrug required to cause a similar degree of toxicity as the drug 5-Fluorouridine. As with GalAraC the prodrug gal5FU can be activated in vitro to produce levels of the drug similar to the pure drug itself. Thus, the addition of the galactose moiety onto the drug reduces the toxicity substantially and to a level that makes it an excellent candidate for a prodrug.  
      Galactosyl-5-fluorouridine has been tested for targeted activation by β-galactosidase conjugated to an antibody with the same CEA antigen tumor surface specificity as was done with the galAraC prodrug. The antibody was allowed to react with antigen-carrying cells (LoVo) and control cells without the CEA antigen marker. The prodrug was then added to different cultures at different concentrations.  
       FIG. 19  displays the results of this experiment which shows that the antibody localized on the surface of the LoVo cells releases a toxic amount of 5-FU from the prodrug at a twenty- to thirty-fold lower concentration than in the control Colo cells (see  FIG. 20 ). Thus, site specific activation of the prodrug increases the efficacy of the drug at a significantly lower concentration.  
      Both gal5FU and 5FU have been tested and compared in mice. The in vivo studies were performed as described for the in vivo galAraC experiments. The drug and prodrug were administered and blood cell counts along with total bone marrow cellularity were measured 6 days following injection. The results of this experiment are displayed in  FIG. 21  through  25 . The figure key in  FIGS. 23 and 24  are the same as for  FIG. 21 .  
      In a pattern similar to the results of the galAraC experiments, the prodrug showed reduced toxicity when compared to the drug itself. This is particularly evident in the neutrophil (see  FIG. 23 ) and lymphocyte (see  FIG. 24 ) cell populations. Total leukocytes (see  FIG. 21 ) show the same marked effect while the red cell population is not severly depleated in this 6 day experiment. The overall difference between the effect of the drug and the less toxic nature of the prodrug are most clearly seen in the measurements of total bone marrow cellularity. These results are displayed in  FIG. 25 .  
      Not only is there no effect of the prodrug, it is also clear that it can be actived with β-galactosidase. Thus, the concept of galactosyl-AraC and galactosyl-5-fluoro-uracil to be used as prodrugs is not only a reasonable approach but from these data should stand a reasonable chance of success.  
     Example 15  
     Preparation of the Intermediate of the Prodrugs in Examples 16 and 20 and of the Haptens of the Prodrugs in Examples 18 and 22, the (Thiazolyl)iminoacetic Ester, Compound 60  
      Refer to  FIG. 26  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      The N-alkoxyphthalimide of bromide 58 is prepared, and then it is treated with hydrazine and 2-formamido-4-thiazolylglyoxylic acid to give acid 59, following the procedure of Takasugi, et al.,  J. Antibiotics  36 (1983):846-854. Activation of the acid carboxyl using N-hydroxysuccinimide gives N-hydroxysuccinimidyl (Z)-2-(2-formamido-4-thiazolyl)-2-(1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-1-methyl)ethoxyiminoacetate 60.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     tert-Butyl 2-bromo-2-methylpropanoate (58)  
      Isobutene is condensed into a solution of 2-bromo-2-methylpropanoic acid (10 mmol) and trifluoromethane sulfonic acid (0.1 mmol) in 100 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  until the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC. The volatile components are evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is filtered through a pad of neutral alumina using 50% ether/hexane. The filtrate is concentrated in vacuo and used without further purification.  
     (Z)-2-(2-Formamido-4-thiazolyl)-2-(1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-1-methyl)ethoxyiminoacetic Acid  
      Compound 59 is synthesized using bromide 58, N-hydroxyphthalimide, and ethyl 2-(formylamino)-4-thiazoleglyoxylate following the procedure given by Takasugi, H., et al.,  J. Antibiotics  36 (1983):846-854, incorporated herein by reference.  
     N-Hydroxysuccinimidyl (Z)-2-(2-formamido-4-thiazolyl)-2-(1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-1-methyl)ethoxyiminoacetate (60)  
      A solution of DCC (11 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to a solution of N-hydroxysuccinimide (10 mmol) and acid 59 (10 mmol) in 90 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  at room temperature. A precipitate forms quickly. After 1 hour, the solution is filtered and the filtrate is washed with water (40 mL), dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a colorless solid.  
     Example 16  
     Preparation of the Prodrug, the 5-fluorouridine Substituted β-lactam, Compound 68  
      Refer to  FIG. 27  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      3-(S)-Amino-4-(S)-hydroxymethylazetidinone (61), prepared following the procedure of Evans, D. A., et al.,  Tetrahedron Lett.  (1985):3783-3786, incorporated herein by reference, is acylated with ester 60 to give amide 62, which then undergoes Swern oxidation and Baeyer-Villiger rearrangement (based on the method of Afonso, A., et al., in Bentley, et al., d. “Recent Advances in the Chemistry of β-Lactam Antibiotics”,  The Royal Society of Chemistry  Special Publ. No. 70 (1989):295-302, incorporated herein by reference) to give ester 64. Protected 5-fluorouridine 65 is prepared and reacted with ester 64 to give azeidinone 66 (based on the method of Aoki, et al.,  Heterocycles  15 (1981):409-413 and  Tetrahedron Lett.  (1979):4327-4330; both incorporated herein by reference), where the alcohol is added to the azetidinone stereoselectively trans to the acylamino group. Azetidinone 66 is sulfonylated following the procedure of Cimarusti, C. M., et al.,  Tetrahedron  39 (1983):2577-2589, incorporated herein by reference, and deprotected to give prodrug 68.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     3-(S)-Amino-4-(S)-hydroxymethylazetidineone (61)  
      Amine 61 can be made following the procedure of Evans, D. A., et al.,  Tetrahedron Lett . (1985):3783-3786, incorporated herein by reference.  
     3-(S)-[(Z)-2-(2-Formamido-4-thiazolyl)-2-(1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-1-methyl)ethoxyiminoacetyl]amino-4(S)-hydroxymethylazetidinone (62)  
      Amine 61 (1 mmol), activated ester 60 (1 mmol), and DMAP (1 mmol) are dissolved in 10 mL of DMF. After the starting material is consumed as observed by TLC, the mixture is poured into water (50 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL), the organic phases are washed with brine (50 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     4(R,S)-Carbonyl-3-(S)-[(Z)-2-(2-formamido-4-thiazolyl)-2-(1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-1-methyl)ethoxyimioacetyl]aminoazetidinone (63)  
      A solution of oxalyl chloride (1.1 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is cooled to −78° C., and a solution of DMSO (1.1 mmol) in 1 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added dropwise. After 15 minutes, a solution of alcohol 62 (1 mmol) in 1 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added dropwise. After 30 minutes, a solution of triethylamine (1.2 mmol) in 1 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added in one portion, and the mixture is allowed to warm to room temperature. The mixture is poured into water (50 mL) and extracted with CH 2 Cl 2  (3×50 mL), the organic phases are washed with water (50 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     4-(R,S)-Carbonyloxy-3-(S)-[(Z)-2-(2-formamido-4-thiazolyl)-2-(1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-1-methyl)ethoxyiminoacetyl]aminoazetidinone (64)  
      m-CPBA (1.5 mmol) is added to a solution of aldehyde 63 (1 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and the mixture is allowed to stand at room temperature until the starting material is consumed as observed by TLC. The mixture is poured into 1M NaHCO 3  (50 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL), the organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     2′,3′-O-Isopropylidene-5-fluorouridine (65)  
      2,2-Dimethoxypropane (2 mL) was added to a solution of 5-fluorouridine (1.05 g, 4 mmol) and TsOH (20 mg) in 5 mL of DMF. After the starting material was consumed as observed by TLC, 20 mL of methanol was added, and the reaction was allowed to stand overnight. Then the solvents were evaporated in vacuo. The resulting solid was recrystallized from hot methanol to give 864 mg of the product as a colorless solid.  
       1 H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) d 1.26 (s, 3), 1.45 (s, 3), 3.50-3.66 (m, 2), 4.04-4.14 (m, 1), 4.70-4.78 (m, 1), 4.82-4.91 (m, 1), 5.81 (bs, 1), 8.17 (d, 1, J=7 Hz), 11.86 (bs, 1)  
      Preparation of the Prodrug Precursor (66)  
      A solution of BF 3 .OEt 2  (0.1 mmol) in 1 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to a solution of ester 64 (I mmol) and alcohol 65 (1 mmol) in 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 . After the starting material is consumed as observed by TLC, the mixture is poured into 0.1M NaHCO 3  (50 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL), the organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Preparation of the Prodrug Precursor 67  
      Trimethylsilyl chlorosulfonate (2 mmol) is added to DMF (4 mL). After 30 minutes, the volatile components are removed in vacuo. The residue is added to a mixture of amide 66 (1 mmol) in 4 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled by an ice bath. After 30 minutes, the solution is poured into 10 mL of 0.5M KH 2 PO 4 . The organic phase is separated, and the aqueous phase is extracted with CH 2 Cl 2  (4 mL) and evaporated to dryness. The solid residue is triturated with methanol (40 mL), and the organic washings are concentrated in vacuo. The residue is used without further purification.  
     Preparation of the 5-fluorouridine-substituted β-Lactam Prodrug (68)  
      Trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) is added to a mixture of compound 67 (1 mmol) and anisole (0.5 mL) in 4 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled by an ice bath. The mixture is allowed to warm to room temperature, and after 1 hour, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by reverse-phase HPLC using 0.1M triethylammonium acetate buffer (pH 7) and acetonitrile mixture as the mobile phase. The fractions containing the product are combined and dried in vacuo, the residue is redried from deionized water (2×), and the residue is then passed through a SP-Sephadex ion exchange column, potassium form, to give the product as the dipotassium salt.  
     Example 17  
     Preparation of the Intermediate of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 16, the 5-Alkynylated Uridine, Compound 74  
      Refer to  FIG. 28  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      The hydroxyl groups of uridine 3a are protected to give compound 70. Compound 70 is iodinated in the 5 position to give iodide 71. A subsequent palladium-catalyzed alkynylation gives compound 73, which is selectively deprotected at the 5′ hydroxyl to give the intermediate 74.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     5-Iodo-2′,3′-O-isopropylideneuridine (69)  
      A solution of triol 3a (10 mmol, synthesis described in Example 16), 2,2-dimethoxypropane (30 mmol), and TsOH (1 mmol) in 10 mL of CH 2 CL 2  is stirred at room temperature until the starting material is consumed as observed by TLC. Triethylamine (2 mmol) is added, and the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified using flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
     5-Iodo-2′,3′-O-isopropylidene-5′-O-(4-methylbenzoyl)uridine (70)  
      4-Methylbenzoyl chloride (10 mmol) is added to a solution of alcohol 69 (10 mmol) in 20 mL of pyridine. After no further progress occurs as observed by TLC, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified using flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
     4-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-1-butyne (72)  
      The crude amine 71, obtained after hydrazinolysis as described in Example 1b, is dissolved in 50 ml of dioxane and 2 mL of triethylamine, and a solution of di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (10 mmol) in 10 mL of dioxane is added. After the reaction is complete as observed by TLC, the mixture is partitioned between 0.05M HCl (50 mL) and ethyl acetate (3×100 mL), the organic phases are dried over MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified using flash chromatography to give the prduct as a colorless oil.  
     5-(4-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-1-butynyl)-2′,3′-O-isopropylidene-5′-O-(4-methylbenzoyl)uridine (73)  
      To a degassed solution of iodide 70 (5 mmol) in 150 mL of triethylamine is added 4-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-1-butyne 72 (10 μmmol), (Ph 3 P) 2 PdCl 2  (0.2 mmol), and CuI (0.3 mmol). The resulting suspension is heated at 50° C. until the starting material is consumed. The volatile components are evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is taken up in CHCl 3  (200 mL) and washed with 5% disodium EDTA (2×100 mL) and water (100 mL), dried over MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
     5-(4-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-1-butynyl)-2′,3′-O-isopropylideneuridine (74)  
      Concentrated ammonium hydroxide (7 mL) is added to a solution of ester 73 (5 mmol) in 90 mL of methanol. After the starting material is consumed as observed by TLC, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     Example 18  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 16, the Cyclobutanol Substituted 5-Fluorouridine, Compound 81  
      Refer to  FIGS. 29 and 30  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      Alcohol 74 undergoes a conjugate addition to ethynylsulfonate 75 to give the enol ether 76. Azidoketene undergoes a [2+2] cycloaddition to enol ether 76 to give cyclobutanone 77. Reduction of the keto, azido, and alkynyl groups gives amino alcohol 79, which is N-acylated and deprotected to give compound 81, which can be linked to a carrier protein at the primary aliphatic amino group.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     tert-Butyl ethynsulfonate (75)  
      A solution of ethynylmagnesium chloride in THF (0.5M, 10 mmol) is added to a solution of sulfuryl chloride (20 mmol) in 100 mL of THF cooled to −78° C. After 1 hour, a solution of tert-butanol (60 mmol) and triethylamine (60 mmol) in 50 mL of THF is added dropwise. The solution is allowed to warm to room temperature, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo, the residue is partitioned between ether (150 mL) and 0.05M HCl (50 mL), the organic phase is washed with brine (50 mL) and dried over MgSO 4 , and the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
     Preparation of uridine 5′-O-enol Ether 76  
      Sodium methoxide (0.05 mmol) is added to a solution of alkyne 75 (11 mmol) and alcohol 74 (10 mmol) in 100 mmol of THF. After the starting material is consumed as observed by TLC, acetic acid (0.1 mmol) is added, and the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. The residue is partitioned between 5% NaHCO 3  (40 mL) and ethyl acetate (3×100 mL), the organic phases are dried over MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Preparation of Cyclobutanone 77  
      A solution of azidoacetyl chloride (10 mmol) in 20 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added dropwise to a solution of triethylamine (11 mmol) and enol ether 76 (5 mmol) in 50 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled to −78° C. The mixture is allowed to warm slowly to room temperature overnight. When no further progress in the reaction is observed by TLC, 1 mL of methanol is added and the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. The residue is passed through a short column of silica gel using ethyl acetate as a solvent.  
      Preparation of Cyclobutanol 78  
      Sodium borohydride (10 mmol) is added to a solution of ketone 77 (2 mmol) in 20 mmol of methanol cooled by an ice bath. When no further progress in the reaction is observed by TLC, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. The residue is partitioned between 0.05M HCl (40 mL) and ethyl acetate (3×100 mL), the organic phases are dried over MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is then passed through a short column of silica gel using ethyl acetate as a solvent, concentrated in vacuo, and used without further purification.  
      Preparation of Amino Alcohol 79  
      Azide 78 (5 mmol) is dissolved in methanol (100 mL), 5% Pd—C (10% by weight) is added, and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere until the starting material is consumed. The catalyst is filtered out using a pad of Celite, and the catalyst is rinsed with methanol (100 mL). The solvent is evaporated in vacuo, and the product is used without further purification.  
      Preparation of Amide 80  
      Amide 80 is synthesized from amine 79 and ester 60 following the procedure used for amide 62.  
      Preparation of Hapten 81  
      Compound 80 is deprotected to give compound 81 using the procedure for compound 68. However, the trifluoroacetate salt may be used for the reaction linking compound 81 at the primary aliphatic amino group to the carrier protein.  
     Example 19  
     Preparation of the Intermediate of the Prodrug in Example 20, the 5-fluorouridine 5′-O-aryl Ester, Compound 85  
      Refer to  FIG. 31  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      Lithium-halogen exchange on bromide 5, followed by reaction with benzyl chloroformate, gives monoester 82. Esterification with 5-fluorouridine 65 gives diester 83, which is selectively deprotected and activated at the benzyl ester group to give the intermediate 85.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     2-Carbobenzyloxy-3,4,5-triethoxybenzoic Acid (82)  
      tert-Butyllithium (1.7M solution in n-pentane, 15 mmol) is added to a solution of 2-bromo-3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoic acid 5 (5 mmol, synthesis described in Example 12) in 50 mL of THF, while maintaining the temperature of the mixture below −95° C. After the addition is completed, the mixture is allowed to warm to −78° C. After 30 minutes, benzyl chloroformate (5 mmol) is added in one portion, and the mixture is allowed to warm to 0° C. Water (50 mL) is added, and then the pH of the mixture is carefully adjusted to 3 using 0.1 M HCl. The mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate (5×100 mL). The organic phases are dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Preparation of Diester 83  
      A mixture of acid 82 (5 mmol), 2′,3′-O-isopropylidene-5-fluorouridine 65 (5 mmol), and EDC (6 mmol) in 50 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is stirred at room temperature until the starting material is consumed. The solution is washed with water (2×30 mL), the aqueous phases are washed with CH 2 Cl 2  (2×50 mL), the organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Preparation of Monoacid 84  
      Diester 83 (2 mmol) is dissolved in ethyl acetate (100 mL), 5% Pd—C (10% by weight) is added, and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere until the starting material is consumed. The catalyst is filtered out using a pad of Celite, and the catalyst is rinsed with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The solvent is evaporated in vacuo, and the product is used without further purification.  
      Preparation of acid Chloride 85  
      Monoacid 84 (1 mmol) is dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2  (20 mL), and thionyl chloride (5 mmol) is added. The progress of the reaction is monitored by methanolysis of aliquots and  1 H-NMR spectroscopy. When the reaction is complete, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo to give compound 85 as an oil.  
     Example 20  
     Preparation of the Prodrug, the β-Lactam Substituted by a 5′-O-aroyl-5-fluorouridine, Compound 90  
      Refer to  FIG. 32  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      N-acylation and amidation, using hydroxylamine, of threonine gives hydroxamic acid 87. Reaction of compound 87 at the more acidic hydroxamic acid hydroxyl using acid chloride 85 gives amide 88 (Miller, M. J., et al.  Tetrahedron  39 (1983):2575), which undergoes ring closure by a Mitsunobu reaction (Miller, M. J., et al.,  J. Am. Chem. Soc.  102 (1980):7026-7032). Subsequent deprotection gives the β-lactam prodrug 90.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     N-[(Z)-2-(2-Formamido-4-thiazolyl)-2-(1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-1-methyl)ethoxyiminoacetyl]threonine (86)  
      A mixture of L-threonine (5 mmol), ester 60 (5 mmol), and DMAP (5 mmol) in 30 mL of DMF is stirred at room temperature. After the starting material is consumed as observed by TLC, the mixture is poured into 0.05M HCl (50 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL), the organic phases are washed with brine (50 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Preparation of Threonine Hydroxamic Acid 87  
      A solution of DCC (5.5 μmmol) in 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to a solution of hydroxylamine hydrochloride (5 mmol), triethylamine (5 mmol), and acid 86 (5 mmol) in 45 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  at room temperature. A precipitate forms quickly. After 1 hour, the solution is filtered and the filtrate is washed with 0.05M HCl (40 mL), the aqueous phase is extracted with CH 2 Cl 2  (50 mL), and the organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a colorless solid.  
     Preparation of O-benzoyl Hydroxamic Acid 88  
      Compound 85 is taken up in 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and added dropwise to a solution of hydroxamic acid 87 (1 mmol) and DMAP (2 mmol) in 20 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled by an ice bath. After 2 hours, the mixture is poured into water (50 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL), the organic phases are washed with brine (50 mL) and dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Preparation of β-Lactam 89  
      A solution of DEAD (1.1 mmol) in 10 mL of THF is added dropwise to a solution of compound 88 (1 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1.1 mmol) in 20 mL of THF at room temperature. After the reaction is complete as observed by TLC, the solvent is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Preparation of β-Lactam Prodrug 90  
      Trifluoroacetic acid (2 mL) was added to a mixture of compound 89 (1 mmol) and anisole (1 mL) in 10 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled by an ice bath. The mixture is warmed to room temperature, and, after 1 hour, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by reverse-phase HPLC using 0.1M triethylammonium acetate buffer (pH 7) and acetonitrile mixture as the mobile phase. The fractions containing the product are combined and dried in vacuo, the residue is redried from deionized water (3×), and the residue is then passed through a SP-Sephadex ion exchange column, potassium form, to give the product as the potassium salt.  
     Example 21  
     Preparation of the Intermediate of the Hapten in Example 22, the 5-Alkynylated Uridine 5′-O-aryl Ester, Compound 92  
      Refer to  FIG. 33  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example. Esterification of acid 82 using alcohol 74 gives diester 91. Selective deprotection of the benzyl ester carboxyl group gives the monoacid 92.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Synthesis of adriamycin prodrug 103 can be prepared starting from adriamycin 101 and benzoic acid 102 ( FIG. 35 ). Adriamycin 101 is treated with benzoic acid 102 in the presence of 1-ethyl 3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide (EDC) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBT) in DMF. In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      General Procedure for the Synthesis of Benzoylamide of Adriamycin Prodrug 103.  
      To a solution of Adriamycin 101 (1 eq) in DMF (0.015 M) add sequentially the benzoic acid 102 (1 eq), 1-ethyl 3(3 dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC, 1.05 eq) and 1-hydroxy benzotriazole (HOBT 1 eq) and stir the reaction mixture under argon atmosphere at room temperature. After completion of the reaction purify the product 103 by chromatography. Other aroylamides can be prepared using the same procedure by substituting the appropriate aroyl carboxylic acids.  
     Example 24  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 23, the Phosphate of the Aroylamide of Adriamycin Compound 104  
      Refer to  FIG. 36  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      The synthesis of transition state analog of adriamycin, compound 104, can be prepared starting from adriamycin 101 and benzenephosphonic acid 105. Adriamycin 101 is treated with benzenephosphonic acid 105 in the presence of EDC and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole in DMF.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      To a solution of adriamycin 101 (1 eq) in DMF add sequentially the benzenephosphonic acid 105 (1 eq), 1-ethyl 3(3 dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide (EDC, 1 eq) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (1 eq) and stir the reaction mixture at room temperature. After completion of the reaction, the product 104 can be purified by chromatography.  
     Example 24a  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 23, the Aroyl Sulphonamides of Adriamycin Compound 106  
      Refer to  FIG. 37  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      Aroyl sulphonamide hapten compound 106 can be prepared by treating adriamycin 101 with benzenesulfonyl chloride 107 in the presence of triethylamine in dry DMF.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Synthesis of TS Analog Compound 106  
      To a solution of adriamycin 101 (1 eq) in DMF in the presence of triethylamine (1.5 eq) under argon atmosphere is added slowly at 0° C. benzenesulphonyl chloride 107 (1.1 eq). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature and after completion of the reaction, the product 106 can be purified by chromatography.  
     Example 25  
     Preparation of Melphalan Aroylamide Prodrugs 109  
      Refer to  FIG. 38  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      Synthesis of melphalan prodrug 109 could be accomplished starting from melphalan 108 and benzoyl chloride.  
      Detail synthesis of compound 109 follows the same procedure as described for the preparation of 106 where benzoyl chloride is used instead of benzenesulphonyl chloride.  
     Example 26a  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 25, the Sulphonamide Compound 110  
      Refer to  FIG. 39  for the bold numbered compounds in this example.  
      Synthesis of hapten of melphalan, compound 110, could be achieved starting from the melphalan 108 and benzenesulphonyl chloride 107 using the similar reaction conditions as described for the preparation 106.  
      Detail synthesis of the compound follows the same procedure as described for the synthesis of 106.  
     Example 27  
     Relative Toxicities of 5-Fluorouridine Ester Prodrugs  
      Fluorouridine is a cytotoxic antineoplastic nucleoside analog, with clinical utility in treating solid tumors in various tissues. Fluorouridine is, however, toxic to normal tissues, particularly bone marrow and gastrointestinal epithelium. Prodrugs of fluorouridine that are activated by catalytic antibodies or enzymes targeted to tumor cells improve the therapeutic index of fluorouridine substantially. It is preferred that the prodrugs not be activated by endogenous enzymes, but rather are readily activated by catalytic antibodies.  
      Catalytic antibodies which cleave esters are prepared through straight-forward methods. Ester substituents attached to the 5′-position of fluorouridine render it non-toxic and protect it from degradation by uridine phosphorylase. 5′-benzoate and substituted 5′-benzoate prodrugs of fluorouridine were administered to mice to determine whether substituents on the benzoate moiety could modify deesterification by endogenous enzymes thereby resulting in prodrugs that are substantially less toxic than fluorouridine itself.  
      Methods  
      Fluorouridine (FUrd) and fluorouridine prodrugs were administered to groups (n=7) of 20-gram female Balb/c mice by intraperitoneal injection, in the following doses: 
      1. Fluorouridine 10 mg/kg.     2. Fluorouridine 50 mg/kg.     3. Fluorouridine 100 mg/kg.     4. 5′-Benzoylfluorouridine (BZ-FUrd) 139.7 mg/kg.     5. 5′-(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)fluorouridine (TMB-FUrd) 156.9 mg/kg.     6. 5′-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl)fluorouridine (TMOX-FUrd) 175.2 mg/kg.    

      The doses of the three aromatic esters of fluorouridine are the molar equivalent of 100 mg/kg fluorouridine.  
      A seventh group (Control) received only the injection vehicle (0.4 ml of 10% DMSO in 0.9% saline).  
      Seven days after administration of fluorouridine or its prodrugs, blood samples were taken from the retro-orbital sinus for determination of differential blood cell counts, cells from one femur of each mouse were collected for counting total marrow cellularity, and spleens were collected and weighed. Body weight was also determined.  
      Results  
      Fluorouracil administration resulted in dose-dependent reductions in blood cell counts and marrow cell counts.  
      100 mg/kg fluorouridine produced a significant reduction in body weight and spleen weight. 5′-Benzoylfluorouridine (139 mg/kg), which was expected to be cleaved by mouse esterase activity was approximately equal in toxicity to a molar equivalent of fluorouridine alone (100 mg/kg), as is reflected in all indices tested.  
      5′-(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)fluorouridine (TMB-FUrd) produced very little evidence of toxicity, with only erythrocyte counts significantly below control values. This compound produced less damage to bone marrow, as determined by marrow cell count and neutrophil counts, than did {fraction (1/10)} the molar equivalent of fluorouridine (FUrd 10 mg/kg).  
      5′-(3,4,5-trimethoxybenzoyl)fluorouridine (TMOX-FUrd) was slightly less toxic than ½ the molar equivalent of fluorouridine (FJ 50 mg/kg).  
      Data are shown in Tables 1 and 2.  
                           TABLE 1                       Cellularity   Body Weight   Spleen Weight   Marrow       Groups   (grams)   (mg)   10 6  cells/femur)                  Control   20.1 ± 0.5   89.9 ± 3.4   8.28 ± 0.69       FUrd 10 mg/kg       89.9 ± 2.0 ns   5.83 ± 0.77       FUrd 50 mg/kg       69.6 ± 2.4*   2.85 ± 0.16*       FUrd 100 mg/kg   16.3 ± 0.6*   57.7 ± 2.5*   0.98 ± 0.19*       BZ-FUrd   17.5 ± 0.6*   61.8 ± 1.2*   1.23 ± 0.10*       TMB-FUrd   19.6 ± 0.4 ns   99.2 ± 4.4 ns   7.88 ± 0.47 ns       TMOX-FUrd   20.0 ± 0.5 ns   73.3 ± 3.5*   3.42 ± 0.29*                 Legend:            *indicates significantly lower than Control value,            P &lt; .05;            ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group.             
 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 2 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Relative toxicities of fluorouridine and fluorouridine prodrugs - 
               
               
                 blood cell counts. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Platelets 
                 Neutrophils 
                 Erythrocytes 
               
               
                 Groups 
                 (K/ml) 
                 (K/ml) 
                 (K/ml) 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Control 
                 741 ± 15 
                 1.747 ± .737 
                 9.01 ± 0.09 
               
               
                 FUrd 10 mg/kg 
                 705 ± 14 ns 
                   607 ± .330 ns 
                 8.33 ± 0.09* 
               
               
                 FUrd 50 mg/kg 
                 433 ± 39* 
                  .020 ± .036* 
                 7.81 ± 0.11* 
               
               
                 FUrd 100 mg/kg 
                 155 ± 20* 
                  .010 ± .019* 
                 7.59 ± 0.25* 
               
               
                 BZ-FUrd 
                 209 ± 31* 
                  .011 ± .030* 
                 7.76 ± 0.22* 
               
               
                 TMB-FUrd 
                 707 ± 23 ns 
                  1.30 ± .338 ns 
                 8.69 ± 0.07* 
               
               
                 TMOX-FUrd 
                 628 ± 27* 
                  .093 ± .039* 
                 7.65 ± 0.11* 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   Legend:    
               
               
                   *indicates significantly lower than Control value,    
               
               
                   P &lt; .05;    
               
               
                   ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group.    
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Example 27a  
     Relative Toxicities of 5-Fluorouridine Ester Prodrugs at High Doses  
      In experiments similar to those described in Example 27, the toxicity of 2,4,6 trimethoxybenzoyl 5-fluorouridine and 2,6 dimethoxybenzoyl 5-fluorouridine were tested in mice at high dose levels in an attempt to determine the maximum tolerated dose.  
      Part I.  
      2,4,6 trimethoxybenzoyl 5-fluorouridine was compared with the toxicity of 5-fluorouridine and controls in 6 groups of Balb C female mice as listed below:  
                                              1)   Control - Saline    0.2 ml i.p.   5 animals       2)   FlUrd     10 mg/kg   5 animals       3)   FlUrd     50 mg/kg   5 animals       4)   Trimethoxybenzoyl FlUrd (TMOXFlUrd)    158 mg/kg           (molar equivalent of 100 mg/kg FlUrd)       5 animals       5)   TMOXFlUrd    316 mg/kg           (molar equivalent of 200 mg/kg FlUrd)       5 animals       6)   TMOXFlUrd    790 mg/kg           (molar equivalent of 500 mg/kg FlUrd)       3 animals                  
 
      Seven days after administration of the drugs, blood samples were taken from the retro orbital sinus for determination of differential blood counts.  
      Results  
      As Table 3 shows below the prodrug modified blood cell counts at the highest dosage only, equivalent to 500 mg/kg of the drug. The toxicity shown at this dose was approximately equivalent to a dose of slightly more than 10 mg/kg of the FlUrd drug itself indicating a toxicity ratio of about 50:1. These high doses of prodrug did not kill the animals proving that they have a very substantial reduction in their toxicity when compared to the FlUrd drug.  
               TABLE 3                          Effect Of FlUrd Versus 2,4,6 Trimethoxybenzoyl FlUrd                                     WBC   Platelets   Neutrophils   Lymphocytes       Group   K/μl   K/μl   K/μl   K/μl               Control   10.32 ± 0.34   730.6 ± 33.7   1.635 ± 0.259    8.31 ± 0.22       FlUrd 10 mg/kg    9.82 ± 0.89 ns   683.8 ± 25.6 ns   0.654 ± 0.200*    8.79 ± 0.76 ns       FlUrd 50 mg/kg   12.03 ± 0.77 ns   312.3 ± 45.3*   0.058 ± 0.033*   11.90 ± 0.76       TMOX FlUrd 100 mg/kg   10.22 ± 0.80 ns   730.6 ± 58.7 ns   1.674 ± 0.212 ns    7.91 ± 0.64 ns       TMOX FlUrd 200 mg/kg    9.28 ± 0.32 ns   833.8 ± 79.6 ns   0.985 ± 0.167 ns    7.83 ± 0.15 ns       TMOX FlUrd 500 mg/kg    7.23 ± 0.24*   771.7 ± 29.5 ns   0.513 ± 0.231*    6.60 ± 0.20                 Legend:            *indicates significantly lower than Control value,            P &lt; .05;            ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group             
 
 Part II. 
 
      High doses of 2,6 dimethoxybenzoyl 5-fluorouridine was compared with the toxicity of 5-fluorouridine and controls in 8 groups of Balb C female mice as listed below.  
                                              1)   Control - Saline    0.2 ml i.p.   7 animals       2)   FlUrd     5 mg/kg   6 animals       3)   FlUrd     10 mg/kg   6 animals       4)   FlUrd     50 mg/kg   6 animals       5)   FlUrd    100 mg/kg   6 animals       6)   2,6 Dimethoxybenzoyl FlUrd       6 animals           (DMOX FlUrd)           the molar equivalent of 100 mg/kg FlUrd       7)   DMOX FlUrd,       6 animals           the molar equivalent of 200 mg/kg FlUrd       8)   DMOX FlUrd,       5 animals           the molar equivalent of 500 mg/kg FlUrd                  
 
      Seven days after administration of the drugs, blood samples were taken from the retro orbital sinus for determination of differential blood counts.  
      Results  
      As shown in Table 4 below, 2,6 dimethylbenzoyl fluorouridine in the large doses used in this experiment produced no evidence of toxicity as measured by leukocytes, platelets, neutrophils and lymphocytes. This prodrug especially at these high doses is very non-toxic, with a toxicity ratio relative to FlUrd of greater than 50:1 for neutrophils, the blood cell type most sensitive to cytotoxic chemotherapy drugs.  
               TABLE 4                          Effects Of FlUrd Versus 2,6 Dimethoxy FlUrd On Blood Cell Counts                                     WBC   Platelets   Neutrophils   Lymphocytes       Group   K/μl   K/μl   K/μl   K/μl               Control   7.34 ± 0.46   769.1 ± 26.4   0.971 ± 0.141   6.02 ± 0.33       FlUrd 5 mg/kg   7.43 ± 0.55 ns   736.0 ± 37.2 ns   1.473 ± 0.386 ns   5.58 ± 0.38 ns       FlUrd 10 mg/kg   8.27 ± 0.64 ns   820.5 ± 34.6 ns   0.637 ± 0.084 ns   7.16 ± 0.59 ns       FlUrd 50 mg/kg   4.88 ± 0.70*   489.0 ± 72.3*   0.208 ± 0.183*   4.62 ± 0.51*       FlUrd 100 mg/kg   1.88 ± 0.46*   178.3 ± 14.8*   0.007 ± 0.003*   1.87 ± 0.46*       DMOX FlUrd 100 mg/kg   7.48 ± 0.29   784.3 ± 11.9   1.335 ± 0.101   5.86 ± 0.37       DMOX FlUrd 200 mg/kg   9.90 ± 0.76   895.0 ± 25.9   2.083 ± 0.242   7.43 ± 0.76       DMOX FlUrd 500 mg/kg   9.02 ± 0.59   909.6 ± 30.3   1.972 ± 0.194   6.78 ± 0.60                 Legend:            *indicates significantly lower than Control value,            P &lt; .05;            ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group             
 
     Example 28  
     Relative Toxicities of 5-Fluorouridine and 5′-β-galactosyl-fluorouridine  
      5′-β-galactosyl-fluorouidine (Gal-Furd) is a prodrug of fluorouridine which can be activated by the non-mammalian enzyme β-galactosidase or by an appropriate catalytic antibody. A crucial issue is the degree to which a sugar attached covalently to the 5′ position reduces the toxicity of fluorouridine. The primary dose-limiting toxicity for antineoplastic fluorinated pyrimidine analogs is damage to bone marrow. The toxicity of fluorouridine versus Gal-Furd was assessed in mice, using blood cell counts and bone marrow cell counts as the indices of toxicity. In addition, Gal-Furd was administered together with the enzyme β-galactosidase to determine if the prodrug could be activated by an enzyme in vivo.  
      Female Balb/C mice (20 grams) were divided into 6 groups, each containing 6 animals: 
      1. Control—Saline 0.2 ml i.p.     2. Fluorouridine—10 mg/kg i.p.     3. Fluorouridine—100 mg/kg i.p.     4. Gal-Furd —160 mg/kg i.p. (molar equivalent of 100 mg/kg fluorouridine)     5. β-galactosidase —5 mg/kg i.p.     6. Gal-Furd 160 mg/kg+β-galactosidase 5 mg/kg i.p. (Gal-Furd was administered after β-galactosidase in a separate injection).    

      Seven days after administration of fluorouridine or Gal-Furd, blood samples were taken from the retro-orbital sinus for determination of differential blood cell counts, and cells from one femur of each mouse were collected for counting total marrow cellularity; spleens were also collected for determination of their weight.  
      Results  
      Seven days after administration of fluorouridine resulted in significant declines in all hematologic indices tested. In contrast, blood cell and bone marrow cell counts seven days after administration of Gal-Furd were within the range of normal values for Balb/C mice. Coadministration of Gal-Furd and β-galactosidase (each administered by a separate injection so that prodrug and enzyme were not in contact prior to administration) resulted in hematologic toxicity, indicating that the relatively nontoxic prodrug was converted to active cytotoxic drug by the enzyme β-galactosidae in vivo. The results are summarized in Tables 5 and 6, and in  FIG. 25 .  
               TABLE 5                          Effects of Furd versus Gal-Furd on spleen weight and marrow       cellularity                             Marrow Cellularity           Groups   Spleen Wt (mg)   (10 6  cells/femur)               Control    92.8 ± 3.5   8.86 ± 1.09       FUrd 10 mg/kg   100.5 ns   —       FUrd 100 mg/kg    53.5 ± 2.1*   0.96 ± 0.25*       Gal-Furd 160 mg/kg    89.9 ± 3.4 ns   9.70 ± 0.81 ns       Galactosidase    91.3 ± 1.9 ns   —       Gal-Furd + Galactosidase    80.2 ± 4.3*   4.04 ± 0.84*                 Legend:            *indicates significantly lower than Control value,            P &lt; .05;            ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group.             
 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 6 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Effects of Furd versus Gal-Furd on blood cell counts 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Platelets 
                 Neutrophils 
                 Lymphocytes 
               
               
                 Groups 
                 (k/ml) 
                 (k/ml) 
                 (M/ml) 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Control 
                 833 ± 30 
                 2.25 ± .22 
                 10.37 ± 0.68 
               
               
                 FUrd 10 mg/kg 
                 809 ± 28 ns 
                 0.75 ± .15* 
                  7.28 ± 0.67* 
               
               
                 FUrd 100 mg/kg 
                 242 ± 12* 
                 0.08 ± .02* 
                  3.07 ± 0.23* 
               
               
                 Gal-Furd 160 mg/kg 
                 770 ± 25 ns 
                 1.90 ± .22 nd 
                  7.39 ± 0.45* 
               
               
                 Gal-Furd + Galactosidase 
                 572 + 39* 
                 0.74 + .07* 
                  4.78 + o.21* 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   Legend    
               
               
                   *indicates significantly lower than Control value,    
               
               
                   P &lt; .05;    
               
               
                   ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group.    
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Example 28a  
     Relative Toxicity of 5-Fluorouridine and 5′-β-Galactosyl Fluorouridine at High Levels  
      In a similar experiment to the one described in Example 28, larger doses of 5′-B-galactosyl fluorouridine was tested to determine the toxic limits of the prodrug. Female Balb C mice were divided and treated with single i.p. doses of the drugs as follows:  
                                                          1) FlUrd   150 mg/kg   5 animals           2) FlUrd   200 mg/kg   5 animals           3) FlUrd   250 mg/kg   5 animals           4) Galactosyl FlUrd   750 mg/kg   3 animals           5) Galactosyl FlUrd   1500 mg/kg    3 animals                      
 
      The mice were checked daily for mortality and signs of toxicity. Seven days after administration of fluorouridine, blood samples were taken from 2 animals in each group.  
      Results  
      The results of this experiment are shown in Table 7 below. Beginning about 5 days after drug treatment, all of the mice that received fluorouridine began to look scruffy and lost about 20% of their body weight. The mice that received galactosylfluorouridine showed no overt signs of toxicity at any time.  
      Neutrophil counts are the most sensitive indicators of bone marrow damage caused by fluorouridine. Gal-FlUrd at 1500 mg/kg changed neutrophil counts less than did fluorouridine at a dose of 10 mg/kg. Neutrophil counts after 1500 mg/kg Gal-FlUrd are in fact within the normal range (1-2.5K cells/microliter). The toxicity ratio of Gal-FlUrd to FlUrd toward bone marrow in vivo is greater than 100:1, i.e. FlUrd is more than 100 times as toxic toward marrow as is Gal-FlUrd.  
      Gal-FlUrd at a dose of 1500 mg/kg is essentially non-toxic in Balb C mice. This dose is far higher than would be administered in a therapeutic scenario involving targeted activation of fluorouridine prodrugs by anti-linked catalytic proteins.  
               TABLE 7                          Effects of FlUrd Versus High Doses Of Gal-FlUrd On Mortality       And Blood Cell Counts       A. Mortality                             Group   Mortality                       FlUrd 150 mg/kg   2/5           FlUrd 200 mg/kg   5/5           FlUrd 250 mg/kg   5/5           Gal-FlUrd 750 mg/kg   0/3           Gal-FlUrd 1500 mg/kg   0/3                      
 
      No animals died until 10 days after treatment with fluorouridine. All animals that died did so between 10 and 15 days after drug administration. The published LD50 for 5-fluorouridine in mice is 160 mg/kg, which corresponds well with the mortality results obtained as a function of dose of fluorouridine in this study.  
                              B. Blood Cell Counts                                         WBC   Neutrophils   Platelets           Group   K/μl   K/μl   K/μl                                                 FlUrd 150 mg/kg   1.0   0.015   145.5           FlUrd 200 mg/kg   0.8   0.02   115           FlUrd 250 mg/kg   0.75   0.01   98           Gal-FlUrd 750 mg/kg   7.25   1.705   862           Gal-FlUrd 1500 mg/kg   6.6   1.315   835                      
 
      Since only 2 animals from each group were sampled for blood cell counts, average values are given with no statistics.  
     Example 29  
     Relative Toxicities of Cyclophosphamide and Aldophosphamide Diethylacetal  
      Cyclophosphamide is an antineoplastic alkylating agent that must undergo enzymatic conversion in the liver to form precursors of its active cytotoxic catabolites. Thus, although cyclophosphamide is a clinically important drug, it is not itself a suitable candidate for targeted delivery. Its active cytotoxic catabolite precursors, e.g., aldophosphamide are unstable. The diethyl acetal of aldophosphamide was prepared as a prodrug of aldophosphamide which could be activated in a single catalytic step by a suitable catalytic protein, such as catalytic antibody. In this experiment, cyclophosphamide and aldophosphamide diethyl acetal were administered to mice to determine whether aldophosphamide diethyl acetal would in fact be relatively non-toxic and therefore suitable for targeted activation by an antibody-catalyst conjugate.  
      Female Balb/C mice (20 grams) were divided into 4 groups, each containing 7 animals: 
      1. Control—Saline 0.2 ml i.p.     2. Cyclophosphamide (CYP)-30 mg/kg i.p.     3. Cyclophosphamide —150 mg/kg i.p.     4. Aldophosphamide diethyl acetal (ALP-DEA)-188 mg/kg i.p. (molar equivalent of 150 mg/kg cyclophosphamide).    

      Four days after administration of the drugs, blood samples were taken from the retro-orbital sinus for determination of differential blood cell counts, and cells from one femur of each mouse were collected for counting total marrow cellularity.  
      Results  
      Four days after administration of cyclophosphamide (150 mg/kg), there were significant declines in all hematologic indices tested. In contrast, leukocyte and bone marrow cell counts four days after administration of aldophosphamide diethyl acetal were within the range of normal values for Balb/C mice. The aldophosphamide diethyl acetal in fact did not reduce neutrophil counts, which were significantly reduced by the lower dose of cyclophosphamide (30 mg/kg). Neutrophil count is perhaps the most sensitivity index for hematopoietic damage caused by the active catabolites of cyclophosphamide. Thus, aldophosphamide diethyl acetal is relative non-toxic to hematopoietic cells compared to cyclophosphamide.  
               TABLE 8                          Effects of cyclophosphamide versus aldophosphamide       diethyl acetal on marrow cellularity.                                 Marrow Cellularity           Groups   (10 6  cells/femur)                       Control   6.33 ± 0.45           CYP 30 mg/kg   6.03 ± 0.29 ns           CYP 150 mg/kg   2.09 ± 0.14*           ALP-DEA 188 mg/kg   7.79 ± 0.59 ns                         Note:                *indicates significantly lower than Control values, P &lt; .05; ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group.             
 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 9 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Effects of cyclophosphomide versus aldophosphamide 
               
               
                 diethyl acetal on blood cell counts 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Neutrophils 
                 Lymphocytes 
                 Platelets 
               
               
                 Groups 
                 (K/μl) 
                 (M/μl) 
                 (K/μl) 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Control 
                 1.11 ± .10 
                 5.59 ± 0.44 
                 775 ± 25 
               
               
                 CYP 30 mg/kg 
                 0.47 ± .08 
                 4.14 ± 0.19* 
                 796 ± 20 ns 
               
               
                 CYP 150 mg/kg 
                 0.04 ± .01* 
                 1.98 ± 0.12* 
                 591 ± 14* 
               
               
                 ALD-DEA 188 mg/kg 
                 1.20 ± .18 ns 
                 5.52 ± 0.40 ns 
                 743 ± 12 ns 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   Note:    
               
               
                   *indicates significantly lower than Control values, P &lt; .05; ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group.    
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Example 30  
     Relative Toxicities of Melphalan, Benzoyl Melphalan and 3,4,5 Trimethoxybenzoyl Melphalan  
      Melphalan is the phenylalanine derivative of nitrogen mustard also known as L-sarcolysin. This alkylating agent is frequently used to treat multiple myeloma, carcinoma of the breast and ovary and some beneficial effects have been reported for malignant melanoma. The toxicity, of melphalan is mostly hematological and is similar to that of other alkylating agents.  
      Benzoyl and 3,4,5 trimethoxybenzoyl melphalan were prepared as prodrugs of melphalan which were designed to be activated by a single step catalytic antibody cleavage to release the active drug, melphalan.  
      In this experiment, the hematological toxicities of the prodrugs were compared with the active drug. The prodrugs were administered in amounts equivalent to 5, 10 and 20 mg/kg of melphalan. Balb C females were divided into 10 groups of 6 animals which received drugs and dosages listed below:  
                                       1) Control - Saline   0.2 ml i.p.        2) Melphalan (Mel)     5 mg/kg i.p.        3) Melphalan    10 mg/kg i.p.        4) Melphalan    20 mg/kg i.p.        5) Benzoyl melphalan (B Mel)   (molar equivalent of 5 mg/kg of           melphalan)        6) B Mel   (molar equivalent of 10 mg/kg of mel)        7) B Mel   (molar equivalent of 20 mg/kg of mel)        8) 3,4,5 trimethoxybenzoyl   (molar equivalent of 5 mg/kg mel)         melphalan (TMB)        9) TMB   (molar equivalent to 10 mg/kg of mel)       10) TMB   (molar equivalent to 20 mg/kg of mel)                  
 
      Four days after administration of the drugs, blood samples were taken from the retro orbital sinus for determination of differential blood counts.  
      Results  
      As shown in the Table 10 below, four days after administration of melphalan, there were significant declines in all the hematologic indices tested. In contrast, following the administration of the prodrug, the leukocyte counts were either not significantly changed (in some cases slightly elevated) or when slightly depressed the largest dose of prodrug never depressed the counts to the level near the lowest doses of melphalan. Neutrophil counts were not changed from normal with either prodrug at any dosage. Thus, the two prodrugs show significant reduction in their toxicity over melphalan.  
               TABLE 10                          Effects Of Melphalan Versus Benzoyl Melphalan And       Trimethoxybenzoyl Melphalan On Blood Cell Counts                                     WBC                       Lymphocytes   Platelets   Neutrophils       Group   K/μl   K/μl   K/μl   K/μl               Control   7.34 ± 0.46   769.1 ± 26.4   0.971 ± 0.141   6.02 ± 0.33       Mel 5 mg/kg   2.66 ± 0.21*   779.6 ± 42.6 ns   0.354 ± 0.036*   2.18 ± 0.19*       Mel 10 mg/kg   1.28 ± 0.09*   643.0 ± 28.9*   0.078 ± 0.011*   1.17 ± 0.07*       Mel 20 mg/kg   0.06 ± 0.08*   570.0 ± 41.5*   0.026 ± 0.007*   0.58 ± 0.08*       B Mel 5 mg/kg   5.34 ± 0.49*   746.3 ± 17.5 ns   0.980 ± 0.105 ns   4.09 ± 0.48*       B Mel 10 mg/kg   5.34 ± 0.31*   869.6 ± 20.1   1.141 ± 0.157 ns   3.98 ± 0.26*       B Mel 20 mg/kg   5.49 ± 0.37*   881.9 ± 12.8   1.357 ± 0.190 ns   3.76 ± 0.20*       TMB mel 5 mg/kg   6.88 ± 0.36 ns   681.2 ± 26.2*   1.126 ± 0.178 ns   5.38 ± 0.46 ns       TMB mel 10 mg/kg   4.67 ± 0.28*   723.2 ± 23.0 ns   0.995 ± 0.110 ns   3.45 ± 0.18*       TMB mel 20 mg/kg   5.54 ± 0.41*   755.4 ± 26.4 ns   0.928 ± 0.099 ns   4.44 ± 0.48*                 Legend: * indicates significantly lower than Control value, P &lt; .05; ns indicates not different from Control (untreated) group             
 
     Example 31  
     Preparation of the Prodrug, Tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)aldophosphamide Diethyl Acetal, Compound 112  
      Refer to  FIG. 40  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      Phosphoramidic dichloride 36 was reacted with bis(2-chloroethyl)amine to form the phosphoramidic chloride 111, which was then reacted with the lithium alkoxide of 3,3-diethoxy-1-propanol to form the prodrug 112.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     N,N,N′,N′,-Tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)phosphorodiamidic Chloride 111  
      Triethylamine (1.18 mL, 8.4 mmol) was added to a mixture of dichloridate 36 (1.0 g, 3.9 mmol), bis(2-chloroethyl)amine hydrochloride (0.758 g, 4.2 mmol) and 38 mL of toluene at room temperature. The mixture was then heated at reflux for 16 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was washed with 10% KH 2 PO 4  (2×20 mL), the aqueous phases were extracted with ether (2×10 mL), and the combined organic phases were concentrated and purified by flash chromatography (25% ethyl acetate/hexane, product R f  0.25 in 30% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 0.52 g of an oil (37%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 3.45-3.63 (m, 8), 3.65-3.78 (m, 8).  
      Synthesis of Compound 112  
      A 2.5 M solution of n-BuLi in hexane (0.81 mL, 2.0 mmol) was added to a solution of 3,3-diethoxy-1-propanol (0.19 mL, 1.3 mmol) in 6 mL of THF at room temperature. After 30 minutes, the mixture was cooled to 0° C., and chloridate 111 (0.47 g, 1.3 mmol) was added. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. After 1 hour, a solution of 10% NaH 2 PO 4  (8 mL) was added, and the mixture was extracted with ether (3×8 mL), the organic phases were dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (eluting with 25, 30, 40, and 50% ethyl acetate/hexane, product R f  0.22 in 30% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 132 mg of the product as an oil (21%); IR (neat) 2975, 2932, 2899, 2879, 1455, 1375, 1347, 1306, 1225, 1132, 1088, 1056, 980, 921, 893, 760, 723, 658 cm −1 ;  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 1.22 (t, 6, J=7.0 Hz), 2.00 (q, 2, J=6.1 Hz), 3.36-3.70 (m, 20), 4.11 (q, 2, J=6.4 Hz), 4.63 (t., 1, J=5.6 Hz);  13 C NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 15.30, 34.72, 34.82, 42.31, 49.65, 49.71, 61.70, 62.20, 99.83.  
     Example 32  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 31: The trimethylammonium salt analog of Tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)aldophosphamide Diethyl Acetal, Compound 119  
      Refer to  FIG. 41  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      A linker moiety was first prepared, and then attached to the phosphorus of the hapten. The nitrogen of glycine was protected as the p-nitrobenzyl urethane to form compound 113. The carboxyl group was then activated as the N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, forming compound 114, which was reacted with excess piperazine to form the linker moiety, compound 115. Compound 115 was reacted with the dichloridate 36 to form the monochloridate 116. Compound 116 was reacted with the lithium alkoxide of 2-(dimethylamino)ethanol, giving the pbosphorodiamide 117. The tertiary amine of compound 117 was quaternized using MeI to give compound 118. Attempts to deprotect the analog of compound 118, where the glycine was protected as the less reactive benzyl urethane, failed; however, the more labile p-nitrobenzyl urethane protecting group was readily removed to give the hapten 119.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Synthesis of Compound 113  
      A solution of 4-nitrobenzyl chloroformate (3.16 g, 14.6 mmol) in 15 mL of dioxane was added to a solution of glycine (1.0 g, 13.3 mmol) in 7 mL of water, maintaining the pH of the solution at 9 using triethylamine. The mixture was allowed to stir for 65 hours. The mixture was then washed with ether, the pH of the aqueous phase was adjusted to 1, and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate, the organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to give 3.9 g of the product as an oil;  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 4.05 (d, 2, J=6 Hz), 5.23 (s, 2), 5.43 (d, 1), 7.52 (d, 2, J=8 Hz), 8.22 (d, 2, J=8 Hz).  
      Synthesis of Compound 114  
      Pyridine (1.24 mL, 15.4 mmol) and N,N′-disuccinimidyl carbonate (3.93 g, 15.3 mmol) were added to a mixture of acid 113 (3.9 g, 15.3 mmol) and 76 mL of acetonitrile at room temperature. After 16 hours, the solvent was evaporated in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water, the organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo to give 4.41 g of the product as an oil (82%).  
      Synthesis of Compound 115  
      A solution of compound 114 (4.4 g, 12 mmol) in 400 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  was added dropwise to a rapidly stirred mixture of piperazine (5.4 g, 63 mmol) and 1000 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled to −78° C. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. The mixture was concentrated to a volume of 200 mL and extracted with 5% HCl, the pH of the aqueous layer was adjusted to 9 using Na 2 CO 3 , and the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate and CH 2 Cl 2 . The organic phases were dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , the solvent was evaporated in vacuo, and the product was purified by flash chromatography (10% methanol/CH 2 Cl 2 , product R f  0.19) to give 1.50 g of an oil (37%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 2.84 (bs, 4), 3.36 (bs, 2), 3.58 (bs, 2), 4.01 (bs, 2), 5.20 (bs, 2), 6.00 (bs, 1), 7.49 (d, 2, J=8 Hz), 8.17 (d, 2, J=8 Hz).  
      Synthesis of Compound 116  
      Triethylamine (0.24 mL, 1.7 mmol) was added to a mixture of amine 115 (0.55 g, 1.7 mmol) and 9 mL of toluene. Then dichloridate 36 (0.44 g, 1.7 mmol) was added, and the mixture was heated at reflux for 14 hours, during which time some dark, insoluble material formed. The mixture was cooled, poured into saturated NaH 2 PO 4 , and extracted with ethyl acetate and CH 2 Cl 2 . The organic phases were dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , the solvent was evaporated in vacuo, and the product was purified by flash chromatography (90% ethyl acetate/hexane, product R f  0.65 in ethyl acetate) to give 0.2 g of an oil (22%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 3.23-3.40 (m, 4), 3.40-3.63 (m, 6), 3.63-3.84 (m, 6), 4.00-4.07 (m, 2), 5.23 (s, 2), 5.87 (s, 1), 7.53 (d, 2, J=8 Hz), 8.22 (d, 2, J=8 Hz).  
      Synthesis of Compound 117  
      A 2.5 M solution of n-BuLi in hexane (0.154 mL, 0.39 mmol) was added to a solution of 2-(dimethylamino)ethanol (37 mL, 0.37 mmol) in 1.5 mL of THF at 0° C. The mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 hour. The solution was cooled again to 0° C., and a solution of chloridate 116 (0.2 g, 0.37 mmol) in 2.5 mL of THF was added. The mixture was allowed to stir for 1.5 hours at room temperature. Approximately 100 mL of triethylamine was then added to the mixture, the volatile components were evaporated in vacuo, and the product was purified by flash chromatography (5% methanol/CH 2 Cl 2 , product R f  0.44 in 10% methanol/CH 2 Cl 2 ). The product was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with 5% NaHCO 3 . After drying the organic layer with anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , the solvent was evaporated to give 0.1 g of the product as an oil (46%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 2.25 (s, 6), 2.54 (t, 2, J=5 Hz), 3.08-3.23 (m, 4), 3.28-3.45 (m, 6), 3.52-3.69 (m, 6), 3.95-4.01 (m, 2), 4.01-4.14 (m, 2), 5.18 (s, 2), 5.95 (s, 1), 7.47 (d, 2, J=8 Hz), 8.16 (d, 2, J=8 Hz).  
      Synthesis of Compound 118  
      Methyl iodide (30 mL, 0.48 mmol) was added to a solution of amine 117 (100 mg, 0.16 mmol) in 2 mL of THF at room temperature. A yellow insoluble oil formed over 24 hours. The volatile components were evaporated in vacuo to give 125 mg of a yellow oil; IR (CD 3 OD) 2952, 2855, 1709, 1651, 1607, 1522, 1453, 1412, 1372, 1350, 1277, 1235, 1220, 753, 725 cm −1 ;  1 H NMR (CD 3 OD) d 3.27 (s, 9), 3.19-3.61 (m, 12), 3.71 (dd, 4, J=6.3, 6.3 Hz), 3.82 (bs, 2), 4.03 (s, 2), 4.50 (bs, 2), 5.23 (s, 2), 7.60 (d, 2, J=8.2 Hz), 8.21 (d, 2, J=8.2 Hz).  
      Synthesis of Compound 119  
      Compound 118 (124.6 mg, 0.17 mmol) was dissolved in 6 mL of 1:1 methanol and water, 10% Pd—C (12 mg) was added, and the mixture was stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere for 18 hours. The mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite, washing with 1:1 methanol and water, and the volatile components were removed in vacuo to give 89 mg of a yellow solid (94%);  1 H NMR (CD 3 OD) d 3.29 (s, 9), 3.15-3.30 (m, 4), 3.38-3.56 (m, 6), 3.56-3.68 (m, 4), 3.68-3.79 (m, 4), 3.82-3.90 (m, 2), 4.50 (bs, 2).  
     Example 33  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 31: The Dipropylmethylammonium Salt Analog of Tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)aldophosphamide Diethyl Acetal, Compound 121  
      Refer to  FIG. 42  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      2-(Di-n-propylamino)ethanol, compound 120, is prepared following the procedure of W. W. Hartmann in  Organic Syntheses , Collective Vol. II; Blatt, A. H., Ed.; John Wiley &amp; Sons: New York, (1943):183-184, incorporated herein by reference. Compound 120 is reacted with compound 116, and the product is transformed in two additional steps to give the hapten 121.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     2-(Di-n-propylamino)ethanol 120  
      Compound 120 is synthesized following the procedure of Hartman, W. W. In  Organic Syntheses , Collective Vol. II; Blatt, A. H., Ed.; John Wiley &amp; Sons: New York, (1943):183-184, incorporated herein by reference, using dipropylamine and 2-chloroethanol.  
      Synthesis of Compound 121  
      Compound 121 is synthesized from compounds 116 and 120 following the procedure used for the synthesis of compound 119 from compound 116 and 2-(diethylamino)ethanol (see Example 32).  
     Example 34  
     Preparation of the Prodrug, Intramolecular Bis(2-hydroxyethoxy)benzoate-5-Fluorouridine, Compound 128  
      Refer to  FIG. 43  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      2-Bromoethanol was protected as the p-methoxybenzyl ether to give compound 122. Compound 123 was formed by condensing 2,6-dihydroxybenzoic acid and methanol. Compound 123 was dialkylated using bromide 122 to give compound 124. In order to determine the stability of the prodrug 128 to undesired noncatalyzed lactonization and concommitant release of the drug, compound 124 was deprotected to form compound 125. Compound 125 was dissolved in 0.9% NaCl in D 2 O. No change was observed in the  1 H NMR spectrum of this sample after standing at room temperature for 96 hours. Compound 124 was saponified to give acid 126, which was condensed with compound 65 to give compound 127. Acidic deprotection of compound 127 gives the prodrug 128.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     2-(4-Methoxybenzyloxy)bromoethane 122  
      Trifluoromethanesulfonic acid (30 mL) was added to a mixture of 2-bromoethanol (0.5 mL, 6.7 mmol), 4-methoxybenzyl trichloroacetimidate (3.8 g, 13.4 mmol), and 15 mL of THF at room temperature. After 1 hour, the reaction was neutralized by the addition of 5% NaHCO 3 , and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , concentrated, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (eluting with 0, 1, and 2.5% ethyl acetate/hexane, product R f  0.48 in 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 1.3 g of an oil (79%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 3.49 (t, 2, J=7 Hz), 3.79 (t, 2, J=7 Hz), 3.82 (s, 3), 4.55 (s, 2), 6.91 (d, 2, J=9 Hz), 7.21 (d, 2, J=9 Hz).  
     Methyl 2,6-dihydroxybenzoate 123  
      DCC (26.3 g, 127 mmol) was added to a mixture of 2,6-dihydroxybenzoic acid (10 g, 64 mmol) and 200 mL of a 1:1 mixture of methanol and CH 2 Cl 2 , and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 64 hours. Then the insoluble material was removed by filtration, the resulting solution was concentrated in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate and refiltered, the filtrate was washed with water and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , concentrated, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (10% ethyl acetate/hexane, product R f  0.29) to give 8.14 g of a colorless solid (76%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 4.08 (s, 3), 6.48 (d, 2, J=8 Hz), 7.31 (dd, 1, J=8, 8 Hz).  
     Methyl 2,6-bis[2-(4-methoxybenzyloxy)ethoxy]benzoate 124  
      A mixture of diphenol 123 (50 mg, 0.30 mmol), bromide 122 (292 mg, 1.19 mmol), K 2 CO 3  (414 mg, 3.0 mmol), and 6 mL of DMF was stirred for 6 hours at room temperature. An additional quantity of K 2 CO 3  was then added. After an additional 17 hours, the mixture was heated at 80° C. for 1 hour. After cooling, the pH of the mixture was adjusted to 5 by the addition of 1 M HCl. The mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate and water, the organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , the solvent was evaporated in vacuo, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (30% ethyl acetate/hexane, product R f  0.58 in 50% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 87 mg of the product as an oil (59%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 3.79-3.90 (m, 4), 3.81 (s, 6), 3.85 (s, 3), 4.20 (dd, 4, J=5, 5 Hz), 4.59 (s, 4), 6.59 (d, 2, J=9 Hz), 6.93 (d, 4, J=9 Hz), 7.27 (dd, 1, J=9, 9 Hz), 7.31 (d, 4, J=9 Hz).  
     Methyl 2,6-bis(2-hydroxyethoxy)benzoate 125  
      To a solution of compound 124 (87 mg, 0.18 mmol) in 3 mL of methanol was added 8.7 mg of 10% Pd—C, and the mixture was stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere at room temperature for 1 hour. The catalyst was removed by filtration through Celite, washing with methanol. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo, and the residue was purified by preparative TLC (product R f  0.54 in 70% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 31 mg of the product as an oil (79%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 3.82-3.96 (m, 4), 3.92 (s, 3), 4.08-4.20 (m, 4), 6.58 (d, 2, J=8 Hz), 7.29 (dd, 1, J=8, 8 Hz); (0.9% NaCl in D 2 O) d 3.90 (dd, 4, J=4, 4 Hz), 3.97 (s, 3), 4.17 (dd, 4, J=4, 4 Hz), 6.79 (d, 2, J=8 Hz), 7.45 (dd, 1, J=8, 8 Hz).  
      Stability of Diol Ester 125 to Lactonization  
      A sample of diol ester 125 was dissolved in 0.9% NaCl in D 2 O. No change was observed in the  1 H NMR spectrum of this sample after standing at room temperature for 96 hours.  
     2,6-Di[2-(4-methoxybenzyloxy)ethoxy]benzoic Acid (126)  
      1 N NaOH (25 mL) was added to a mixture of compound 124 (1.22 g, 2.46 mmol) and 30 mL of dioxane, and then 10 mL of MeOH was added to the mixture to help maintain a homogeneous solution. The mixture was heated by an oil bath at 100° C. for 24 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and the pH of the solution was adjusted to 5 using 1 N HCl. The mixture was poured into ethyl acetate, washed with water and brine, and the organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product, 1.1 g, was used without further purification; R f  0.40 (5% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 );  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 3.76-3.89 (m, 10), 4.19 (dd, 4, J=9, 9 Hz), 4.55 (s, 4), 6.59 (d, 2, J=8 Hz), 6.88 (d, 4, J=8 Hz), 7.24-7.37 (m, 5).  
      Synthesis of Compound 127  
      Compound 65 (81 mg, 0.27 mmol) was added to a mixture of compound 126 (516 mg, 1.07 mmol), 864 mL of pyridine, and 1 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 , and then EDC (205 mg, 1.07 mmol) and DMAP (65 mg, 0.53 mmol) were added. The mixture was heated at 80° C. for 24 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, and 10 mL of MeOH was added. After an additional 30 minutes, the volatile components were evaporated in vacuo, and the residue was taken up in ethyl acetate and washed with saturated NaHCO 3 , water, saturated NH 4 Cl and water, and the organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the residue by flash chromatography (eluting with 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60% ethyl acetate/hexane) gave 154 mg of the product (75%); R f  0.50 (60% ethyl acetate in hexane);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 1.34 (s, 3), 1.57 (s, 3), 3.71-3.76 (m, 4), 3.79 (s, 6), 4.16 (dd, 4), 4.29 (dd, 1, J=2.5, 12.2 Hz), 4.46 (d, 1, J=3.1 Hz), 4.46 (d, 2, J=12.6 Hz), 4.50 (d, 2, J=12.6 Hz), 4.66-4.74 (m, 2), 4.82 (dd, 1, J=3.2, 6.1 Hz), 5.90-5.91 (m, 1), 6.57 (d, 2, J=8.5 Hz), 6.86 (d, 4, J=8.6 Hz), 7.24 (d, 4, J=8.6 Hz), 7.28 (d, 1, J=8.5 Hz), 7.42 (d, 1, J=6.2 Hz), 9.11 (d, 1, J=4.2 Hz).  
      Synthesis of Compound 128  
      The reaction is carried out following the procedure for the synthesis of compound 1a.  
     Example 35  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 34: The Cyclic Phosphonate Analog of Bis(2-hydroxyethoxy)benzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 137  
      Refer to  FIG. 44  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      Resorcinol is monoalkylated using bromide 122 to give compound 129. Phosphorylation of phenol 129 gives the phosphate triester 130, which undergoes phosphorus migration after ortho-lithiation using LDA to give compound 131. Hydroxyethylation of compound 131 by ethylene carbonate or glycol sulfite gives compound 132, which is cyclized under high dilution conditions to give compound 133. Saponification gives acid 134, which is activated and reacted with compound 3f to give compound 135. The toluoyl groups of compound 135 are cleaved off to give compound 136, which is deprotected and reduced to give the hapten 137.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Synthesis of Compound 129  
      A mixture of resorcinol (5 mmol), compound 122 (1 mmol), K 2 CO 3  (5 mmol), and 25 mL of DMF is stirred at room temperature until the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC. The mixture is neutralized with 0.1 M HCl, diluted with water, and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Synthesis of Compound 130  
      A mixture of diphenyl chlorophosphate (1.2 mmol) and 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to a mixture of compound 129 (1 mmol) and 5 mL of pyridine cooled to 0° C. After the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is partitioned between ethyl acetate and 0.1 M HCl, the organic phase is dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Synthesis of Compound 131  
      A 1.5 M solution of LDA in THF (1.1 mmol) is added dropwise to a solution of compound 130 (1 mmol) in THF (20 mL) cooled to −78° C. After the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC, the mixture is partitioned between ethyl acetate and 0.1 M HCl, the organic phase is dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Synthesis of Compound 132  
      A mixture of compound 131 (1 mmol), ethylene carbonate or glycol sulfite (10 mmol), K 2 CO 3  (10 mmol), and 50 mL of DMF is heated at 100° C. until the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC. The mixture is cooled to room temperature, neutralized with 0.1 M HCl, diluted with water, and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Synthesis of Compound 133  
      A mixture of compound 132 (1 mmol), anhydrous KF (10 mmol), 18-crown-6 (1 mmol), and 100 mL of THF is heated at reflux until the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC. Then, the solvent is evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless oil.  
      Synthesis of Compound 134  
      0.2 M NaOH (5 mL) was added to a solution of compound 133 (1 mmol) in 5 mL of dioxane at room temperature. After the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC, the pH of the mixture is adjusted to 2 with 0.1 M HCl, and the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
      Synthesis of Compound 135  
      A mixture of compound 134 (1.1 mmol) and 10 mL of thionyl chloride is stirred at room temperature until conversion to the acid chloride is complete, as determined by  1 H NMR of an aliquot of the reaction quenched with methanol. The unreacted thionyl chloride is evaporated in vacuo. The residue is taken up in 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and added slowly to a mixture of compound 3f (1 mmol) and 5 mL of pyridine cooled to 0° C. After the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo, the residue is taken up in ethyl acetate, the organic phase is washed with saturated NaHCO 3 , 0.1 M HCl, and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the residue by flash chromatography gives the product as a colorless solid.  
      Synthesis of Compound 136  
      Concentrated ammonium hydroxide (1 mL) is added to a mixture of compound 135 (1 mmol) and 20 mL of methanol at 0° C. The solution is allowed to warm to room temperature. After the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
      Synthesis of Compound 137  
      Ten percent Pd—C (10 weight %) is added to a mixture of compound 136 (1 mmol) and 20% aqueous methanol (10 mL), and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere. When the reaction is complete, the catalyst is removed by filtration through a pad of Celite, washing with 20% aqueous methanol. Evaporation of the volatile components in vacuo gives the product as a solid.  
     Example 36  
     Preparation of the Prodrug, Intramolecular Bis(3-hydroxypropyloxy)benzoate-5-fluorouridine, compound 138  
      Refer to  FIG. 45  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      3-Bromo-1-propanol is transformed into the prodrug 138 using the same reactions as is used for the preparation of prodrug 128 (see Example 34).  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Synthesis of Compound 138  
      Compound 138 is synthesized following the procedure for the synthesis of compound 128, but starting with 3-bromo-1-propanol in place of 2-bromoethanol.  
     Example 37  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 36: the Cyclic Phosphonate Analog of Bis(3-hydroxypropyloxy)benzoate-5-fluorouridine, Compound 139  
      Refer to  FIG. 46  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      Resorcinol is transformed into the cyclic phosphonate hapten 139 using the same sequence of reactions used to prepare hapten 137 (see Example 35), using 3-bromopropyl 4-methoxybenzyl ether (prepared as an intermediate in Example 36).  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Synthesis of Compound 139  
      Compound 139 is synthesized following the procedure for the synthesis of compound 137, but starting with 3-bromo-1-propanol in place of 2-bromoethanol.  
     Example 38  
     Preparation of the Prodrug: 5′-O-(2,4,6-Trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, Compound 141  
      Refer to  FIG. 47  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      2,4,6-Trimethoxybenzoic acid was condensed with compound 65 using EDC to give ester 140. Subsequently, the isopropylidene protecting group was removed to give the prodrug 141.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
     2′,3′-O-Isopropylidene-5′-O-(2,4,6-trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 140  
      2,4,6-Trimethoxybenzoic acid (300 mg, 1.42 mmol) was dissolved in 2 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 , and 1.15 mL of pyridine was added. Compound 65 (106 mg, 0.35 mmol) was added, followed by EDC (300 mg, 1.56 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 24 hours before adding 10 mL of methanol. After an additional 30 minutes, the volatile components were evaporated in vacuo, and the residue was taken up in ethyl acetate (75 mL) and washed with saturated NaHCO 3  (2×50 mL), water (15 mL), saturated NH 4 Cl (2×30 mL), and water (15 mL). All the aqueous phases were extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), and the organic phases were dried over anhydrous MgSO 4  and concentrated. The residue was purified by preparative TLC (10% methanol/CH 2 Cl 2 , R f  0.50 in 8% methanol/CH 2 Cl 2 ) to give 100 mg of the product as a colorless solid (58%);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 1.38 (s, 3), 1.61 (s, 3), 3.81 (s, 6), 3.83 (s, 3), 4.33 (dd, 1, J=2.4, 12.3 Hz), 4.62 (dd, 1, J=small, 2.2 Hz), 4.72-4.77 (m, 2), 4.83 (dd, 1, J=2.1, 6.1 Hz), 5.92-5.93 (m, 1), 6.11 (s, 2), 7.58 (d, 1, J=6.3 Hz).  
     5′-O-(2,4,6-Trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine 141  
      A mixture of compound 140 (100 mg, 0.20 mmol) and 1.5 mL of 50% formic acid was heated at 65° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was cooled, and the volatile components were evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative TLC (10% methanol/CH 2 Cl 2 , R f  0.52) to give 84 mg of the product as a colorless solid (92%);  1 H NMR (CD 3 OD) d 3.76 (s, 6), 3.80 (s, 3), 4.10-4.12 (m, 1), 4.18 (dd, 1, J=5.1, 5.1 Hz), 4.23-4.27 (m, 1), 4.34 (dd, 1, J=2.6, 16 Hz), 4.62 (dd, 1, J=2.2, 16), 5.88 (dd, 1, J=1.6, 4.1 Hz), 6.21 (s, 2), 7.76 (d, 1, J=6.6 Hz).  
     Example 39  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug in Example 38, the Pyridinium Alcohol-Substituted Analog of Uridine, Compound 149  
      Refer to  FIGS. 48   a  and  48   b  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      Compound 142, the aldehyde of compound 65, is synthesized following a literature procedure. The aldehyde group undergoes a Wittig reaction to form compound 143. Compound 144 was synthesized following literature precedent, and was brominated to give monobromide 145. It was found that compound 144 must be used in an excess, and the reaction done at a low temperature, in order to get selective monobromination, otherwise the major product is 2,6-dibromo-3,4-dimethoxypyridine. Compound 145 undergoes lithium-halogen exchange, and the reactive intermediate is reacted with compound 143 to give the pyridinium alcohol 146. Ammonolysis gives triol 147, which is selectively methylated at the more nucleophilic pyridine nitrogen to give the quaternary ammonium salt 148. Finally, reduction gives the hapten 149.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Synthesis of Compound 142  
      Compound 142 is synthesized from compound 65 following the procedure in Ranganathan, R. S.; Jones, G. H.; Moffat, J. G.  J. Org. Chem.  39 (1974):290-298, incorporated herein by reference.  
      Synthesis of Compound 143  
      A solution of (triphenylphosphoranylidene)acetaldehyde (1.1 mmol) in 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  is added to a solution of compound 142 (1 mmol) in 5 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  at room temperature. After the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC, the mixture is concentrated to half its volume and purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
     2-Bromo-3,5-dimethoxypyridine 145  
      A solution of bromine (0.17 mL, 3.3 mmol) in 66 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  was added dropwise to a solution of 3,5-dimethoxypyridine, compound 144, (1.83 g, 13.2 mmol, prepared following the procedure of Johnson, C. D.: Katritzky, A. R.; Viney, M.  J. Chem. Soc.  (B), (1967):1211-1213, incorporated herein by reference in 66 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  cooled to −78° C. After 1 hour, the mixture was allowed to warm slowly to room temperature over 16 hours. The volatile components were evaporated in vacuo, the residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and aqueous sodium thiosulfate adjusted to pH 10 using 1 M NaOH, and the organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4  and concentrated in vacuo. The yellow oil was separated by flash chromatography (20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 1.0 g of the product (R f  0.53 in 50% ethyl acetate/hexane) and 1.1 g of recovered starting material (R f  0.28 in 50% ethyl acetate/hexane);  1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) d 3.91 (s, 3), 3.93 (s, 3), 6.77 (bs, 1), 7.73 (bs, 1).  
      Synthesis of Compound 146  
      A 2.5 M solution of n-BuLi in hexane (0.4 mL, 1 mmol) is added to a solution of compound 145 (0.9 mmol) in 10 mL of THF at 0° C. After 1 hour, the mixture is cooled to −78° C., and a solution of compound 146 (0.9 mmol) in 1.5 mL of THF is added in one portion. The solution is allowed to warm to room temperature after 1 hour. After the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC, water is added and the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate, the organic phase is dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4  and concentrated in vacuo, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
      Synthesis of Compound 147  
      Concentrated ammonium hydroxide (1 mL) is added to a mixture of compound 146 (1 mmol) and 20 mL of methanol at 0° C. The solution is allowed to warm to room temperature. After the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC, the volatile components are evaporated in vacuo, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography to give the product as a colorless solid.  
      Synthesis of Compound 148  
      A mixture of compound 147 (1 mmol), methyl iodide (2 mmol), and 10 mL of THF in a sealed tube is heated at 60° C. until the starting material is consumed, as observed by TLC. The precipitate is filtered and washed with ether to give the product as a solid.  
      Synthesis of Compound 149  
      Ten percent Pd—C (10 weight %) is added to a mixture of compound 148 (1 mmol) and 20% aqueous methanol (10 mL), and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere. When the reaction is complete, the catalyst is removed by filtration through a pad of Celite, washing with 20% aqueous methanol. Evaporation of the volatile components in vacuo gives the product as a solid.  
     Example 40  
     Relative Toxicities of Cyclophosphamide and 3,3-diethoxypropyl N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)phosphorodiamide (Tetrakis)  
      In this experiment, cyclophosphamide and 3,3-diethoxypropyl N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(2-chloroethyl)phosphorodiamide Tetrakis were administered to mice to determine whether aldophosphamide diethylacetal would in fact be relatively non-toxic, and therefore, suitable for targeted activation by an antibody-catalyst conjugate.  
      Female Balb/C mice (20 grams) were divided into 4 groups, each containing 5 animals: 
          1. Control—Saline 0.2 ml i.p.     2. Cyclophosphamide (CYP)-30 mg/kg i.p.     3. Cyclophosphamide —150 mg/kg i.p.     4. Tetrakis —248 mg/kg i.p. (molar equivalent of 150 mg/kg cyclophosphamide        

      Five days after administration of the drugs, blood samples were taken from the retro-orbital sinus for determination of differential blood cell counts.  
      Results  
      Five days after administration of cyclophosphamide (150 mg/kg), there were significant declines in all hematologic indices tested. In contrast, leukocyte and bone marrow cell counts five days after administration of Tetrakis were within the range of normal values for Balb/C mice. The Tetrakis, in fact, did not reduce neutrophil counts, which were significantly reduced by the lower dose of cyclophosphamide (30 mg/kg). Neutrophil count is perhaps the most sensitivity index for hematopoietic damage caused by the active catabolites of cyclophosphamide. Thus, Tetrakis is relatively non-toxic to hematopoietic cells compared to cyclophosphamide.  
               TABLE 11                          Effects of cyclophosphamide versus Tetrakis on blood cell counts.                                 Neutrophils   Lymphocytes   Platelets       Groups   (K/_l)   (K/_l)   (K/_l)               Control    0.82 + .32   4.26 + 0.68    765 + 41       CYP 30 mg/kg    0.41 + .23*   3.96 + 0.66 ns    776 + 37 ns       CYP 150 mg/kg    0.07 + .06*   2.53 + 0.26*    867 + 109 ns       Tetrakis 248 mg/kg   0.775 + .28 ns   3.45 + 0.88 ns   1000 + 177 ns                 —indicates significantly lower than Control values, P &lt; .05            ns - indicates not different from Control (untreated) group             
 
     Example 41  
     Suppression of Immune Responses to Therapeutic Nonhuman Antibodies by Chemical Modification  
      The therapeutic effectiveness of nonhuman antibodies is limited by the immune response that is potentially harmful to the patient. Serious complications may occur including serum sickness, anaphylactic symptoms, and deposition of toxic immune complexes in the liver (Abuchowski, A., “Effect of Covalently Attached Polyethylene Glycol on the Immunogenicity and Activity of Enzymes”, Rutgers University, New Jersey, 1975; Sehon, A. H., “Suppression of Antibody Responses by Chemically Modified Antigens”,  Int. Arch. Allergy Appl. Immunol.  94 (1991):11-20). Two ways to obviate immunogenicity are to use human antibodies and to use genetically “humanized” animal antibodies in which CDRs, from a murine antibody for example, have been grafted onto a human antibody framework. Alternatively, antibodies can be chemically derivatized with nonimmunogenic, nonallergenic, nonantigenic molecules which mask the foreign protein and thereby suppress the host immune response (Abuchowski, A., “Effect of Covalently Attached Polyethylene Glycol on the Immunogenicity and Activity of Enzymes”, Rutgers University, New Jersey, 1975; Sehon, A. H., “Suppression of Antibody Responses by Chemically Modified Antigens”,  Int. Arch. Allergy Appl. Immunol.  94 (1991):11-20). The host immune response can be substantially reduced by conjugation of foreign proteins to, for example, copolymers of D-glutamic acid and D-lysine (D-GL), polyethylene glycols (PEG), monomethoxypolyethylene glycols (mPEG), or polyvinyl alcohols (PVA) (Sehon, A. H., “Suppression of the IgE Antibody Responses with Tolerogenic Conjugates of Allergens and Haptens”,  In Progress In Allergy , Vol. 32 (1982):161-202). In each case, a protein such as an antibody (Ab) is modified with multiple molecules (n) of the conjugate; i.e. Ab(PEG) n . The suppression of the immune response depends on an optimum value of n; if n is too small or too large the effect is not as substantial (Jackson, C. and J. C., Charlton, J. L., Kuzminski, K., Lang, G. M., Sehon, A. H., “Synthesis, Isolation, and Characterization of Conjugates of Ovalbumin with Monomethoxypolyethylene Glycol using Cyanuric Chloride as the Coupling Agent”,  Anal. Biochem.  165 (1987):114-127). The optimal value of n can be determined without undue experimentation by one skilled in the art by preparing antibodies with different values of n and determining the immunogenicity of each modified antibody in a host animal.  
      Conjugation of a catalytic antibody or catalytic/tumor-binding bispecific antibody to nonantigenic molecules can be carried out as follows (Jackson, C. and J. C., Charlton, J. L., Kuzminski, K., Lang, G. M., Sehon, A. H., “Synthesis, Isolation, and Characterization of Conjugates of Ovalbumin with Monomethoxypolyethylene Glycol using Cyanuric Chloride as the Coupling Agent”,  Anal. Biochem.  165 (1987):114-127). The optimum value of n (see above) is determined experimentally by one skilled in the art and the procedure can be varied to achieve this degree of conjugation. Preferably the antibody is conjugated to mPEG, although other conjugates may also provide the desired effect. mPEG is preferred over PEG because PEG has two terminal hydroxyl groups which may participate in undesirable intra- and inter-molecular crosslinking of conjugates (Sehon, A. H., “Suppression of Antibody Responses by Chemically Modified Antigens”,  Int. Arch. Allergy Appl. Immunol.  94 (1991):11-20). The type of mPEG, for example mPEG 6  (average molecular weight=6000) or mPEG 20  (average molecular weight=20,000) may also be chosen without undue experimentation. Additionally, the scale of the procedure is altered accordingly, depending on how much conjugated antibody is available or required.  
      Preparation of the mPEG-conjugated antibody consists of two main steps; 
          1. Preparation of an active intermediate, 2-O-mPEG-4,6-dichloro-s-triazine (“mPEG intermediate”).     2. The MPEG intermediate is reacted in the correct proportions with the antibody to form a conjugate with the desired value of n.        

      Because cyanuric chloride and the mPEG intermediate are exceedingly susceptible to hydrolysis, all reagents must be completely anhydrous and protected from atmospheric moisture. mPEG (20 g) is dissolved in anhydrous benzene (320 mL) at 80° C. Any moisture that may be associated with MPEG is removed by distillation of the benzene to approximately 160 mL. Under a nitrogen atmosphere, excess cyanuric chloride (6.64 g, recrystallized from anhydrous benzene), is added, followed by potassium carbonate (4.0 g, anhydrous, powdered) and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 15 hours. Following this, the mixture is filtered through a sintered glass filter (under nitrogen). The filtrate is mixed with anhydrous petroleum ether (200 mL) to precipitate the MPEG intermediate, which is separated from reactants by filtration through a sintered glass filter under nitrogen. The precipitate is dissolved in 150 mL benzene and again precipitated with petroleum ether. This is repeated seven times to remove all residual cyanuric chloride. The MPEG intermediate is then dissolved in benzene, frozen at −78° C. The benzene is sublimated under high vacuum, to leave a white powder (mPEG intermediate). The MPEG intermediate can be stored in nitrogen in sealed vials (1 g or less per vial) at −60° C.  
      To obtain the antibody-mPEG conjugate (Ab(mPEG)) of varying n, different amounts of mPEG intermediate is added to 40 mg Ab, which is dissolved in sodium tetraborate (4 mL, 0.1 M, pH 9.2). The mixture is stirred for 30 minutes at 4° C., then for 30 minutes at room temperature.  
      Following conjugation, the mixture is passed through a Sephadex G-25 column (2.5×40 cm) equilibrated with 25 mM Tris buffer, pH 8.0. The conjugates are finally purified on a DEAE-Trisacryl column (5×40 cm) pre-equilibrated in 25 mM Tris, pH 8.0. The protein is bound to the column in this starting buffer, followed by a wash in the same Tris buffer. The proteins are eluted with a linear salt gradient ending in 50 mM NaCl, 25 mM Tris, pH 8.0.  
     Example 42  
     Production and Application of a Bispecific Antibody that Targets a Tumor Antigen and Activates a Prodrug into an Active Anticancer Drug at the Tumor  
      The prodrug 5′-O-(2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl-5-fluorouridine), compound 1c in example 1a was prepared as described in Example 1a and tested for toxicity in mice. The toxicity in vivo of the prodrug as measured by effect on segmented neutrophils counts was substantially better than 50 times less toxic than the drug 5-Fluorouridine. The transition state analogue, the phosphonate ester of dimethoxy benzoyl fluorouridine compound 155 is prepared as described in Example 44. After conjugation of the phosphonate analogue to the carrier protein, keyhole limpet hemocyanin it is used to immunize mice and to produce monoclonal antibodies using traditional procedures. In addition, the spleens from mice with high titre antisera are used as a source of polyadenylated RNA. The RNA is primed with oligonucleotide primers complementary to mouse immunoglobulin families in a PCR amplification protocol. The PCR products are cloned into the fd phage vectors as described in Patent Application WO 92/01047 incorporated herein by reference. The resulting phage library and monoclonal antibodies produced in the traditional fashion are screened for binding to the transition state analog using procedures described in the literature. Candidate antibodies with the potential of being catalytic are screened for catalysis as described in the section above titled “Screening Antibodies for Esterase Catalytic Activity”.  
      Bispecific single chain antibodies are produced using the following methods. A monoclonal specific for the cancer of interest, in this instance, B72.3, or other tumor specific antibody well known in the art, is cloned using methods already described. The antibody is cloned into the form of a single chain and characterized by expression in vectors known in the art. This single chain antibody gene is then combined with a single chain gene for the catalytic antibody isolated as described above. The linking of these two single chain genes is in the form of the linkers already described for the combination of the single chains or other sequences known to be involved with the linkage of antibody domains; specifically genes coding for (ser-lys-ser-thr-ser) 3 , or hinge regions. These linked genes are then placed into an expression vector; in this instance, the vector pRC/CMS from In Vitrogen Inc., or other similar expression vectors known in the art. The introduction of this bispecific single chain gene into the expression vector is followed by the introduction of the combined vector into the host for that expression vector, in the case of this pRC/CMS vector, mammalian cells are the host. It will be appreciated that many host vector systems exist and have certain merits well known in the art. As examples of these systems,  E. coli , yeast, and insect cells are extensions well known in the art of the system described above.  
      The recovery of expressed bispecific single chain is performed by protein purification methods known in the art, the recovered protein is characterized by the determination of the specific activity of the catalytic activity and the binding activity in combination with the catalytic activity to determine the purity of the material for treatment of tumors both in animals and man. The antibodies elicited by traditional monoclonal methods and by the phage library technique both bind to and cleave compound 1c, as do the purified bispecific single chain (bivalent) antibody.  
      The bivalent antibody and the prodrug are formulated and administered as described above in the section titled “Formulation and Administration”.  
     Example 43  
     Preparation of the Hapten of the Prodrug 141 in Example 38, the Linear Phosphonate of 5′-O-(2,4,6-Trimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, Compound 152  
      Refer to  FIG. 49  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example. 1,3,5-Trimethoxybenzene is lithiated with n-butyllithium and then reacted with N,N-diisopropylmethyl phosphonamidic chloride to give 150. Subsequent condensation with 3f in the presence of tetrazole and in situ oxidation with mCPBA affords 151. Removal of all protecting groups using thiophenol, catalytic hydrogenation and ammonium hydroxide give the prodrug hapten 152.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Compound 150  
      n-Butyllithium (2-5 M is hexane, 1 mmol) is added to a solution of 1,3,5-trimethoxybenzene (1 mmol) in 2 mL of THF, while maintaining the temperature of the mixture below 0° C. After the addition is completed, the mixture is stirred at 0° C. for a further 2 hours. It is then cooled to −78° C. whereupon N,N-Diisopropylmethyl phosphonamidic chloride (1 mmol) is added. After the addition is completed, the mixture is stirred at −78° C. for a further 2 hours. Triethylamine (5 ml) in EtOAc (45 ml) is added and the mixture is poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate (75 ml). The organic phase was further worked with saturated sodium bicarbonate (75 ml), brine (50 ml), dried over anhydrous Na 2  SO 4 , concentrated in vacuo, redissolved in triethylamine (0.3 ml) in hexane (2.7 ml), and purified by flash chromatography using 10% triethylamine in hexane to give the product (compound 150) as a colorless solid.  
      Compound 151  
      Compound 150 (1 mmol) is dissolved in 3 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and compound 3f (0.20 mmol) followed by tetrazole (2.5 mmol) are added. After one hour, mCPBA (1.25 mmol) is added and the mixture is stirred for a further 15 minutes, poured into saturated NH 4 Cl (30 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2×50 mL). Organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product, compound 151.  
      Compound 152  
      Compound 151 (1 mmol) is dissolved in 1 mL of dioxan and a solution of thiophenol (10 mmol) and triethylamine (10 mmol) in dioxan (5 mL) is added. The mixture is stirred for 16 hours. It is then concentrated in vacuo, redissolved in 2 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and added dropwise to 300 mL of petroleum ether with stirring. The precipitate is collected after decanting and is redissolved in 2 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and again added dropwise to another 300 mL of petroleum ether with stirring. The precipitate is again collected after decanting, redissolved in 20 mL of EtOAc, 5% Pd—C (10 weight %) is added and the mixture is stirred at room temperature under an atmosphere of hydrogen until uptake of hydrogen is complete. The catalyst is removed by filtration through a pad of celite, washing with methanol. The filtrate is collected, concentrated in vacuo and a solution of this hydrogenated compound (1 mmol) and ammonium hydroxide (10 mL) in methanol (10 mL) is heated in a sealed tube for overnight. After completion of the reaction solvents are removed in vacuo and the product is purified by reverse phase HPLC to give compound 152.  
     Example 44  
     Preparation of the Hapten for the Prodrug 1c in Example 1a, the Linear Phosphonate of 5′-O-(2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl)-5-fluorouridine, Compound 155  
      Refer to  FIG. 50  for the bold numbered compounds in this Example.  
      1,5-Dimethoxybenzene is lithiated with n-butyllithium and then reacted with N,N-diisopropylmethyl phosphonamidic chloride to give 150. Subsequent condensation with 3f in the presence of tetrazole and in situ oxidation with mCPBA affords 151. Removal of all protecting groups using thiophenol, catalytic hydrogenation, and ammonium hydroxide gives the prodrug hapten 152.  
      In detail, the synthesis is as follows:  
      Compound 153  
      n-Butyllithium (2-5 M is hexane, 1 mmol) is added to a solution of 1,5-dimethoxybenzene (1 mmol) in 2 mL of THF, while maintaining the temperature of the mixture below 0° C. After the addition is completed, the mixture is stirred at 0° C. for a further 2 hours. It is then cooled to −78° C. whereupon N,N-Diisopropylmethyl phosphonamidic chloride (1 mmol) is added. After the addition is completed, the mixture is stirred at −78° C. for a further 2 hours. Triethylamine (5 ml) in EtOAc (45 ml) is added and the mixture is poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate (75 ml). The organic phase was further worked with saturated sodium bicarbonate (75 ml), brine (50 ml), dried over anhydrous Na 2  SO 4 , concentrated in vacuo, redissolved in triethylamine (0.3 ml) in hexane (2.7 ml), and purified by flash chromatography using 10% triethylamine in hexane to give the product (compound 153) as a colorless solid.  
      Compound 154  
      Compound 153 (1 mmol) is dissolved in 3 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and compound 3f (0.20 mmol) followed by tetrazole (2.5 mmol) are added. After one hour, mCPBA (1.25 mmol) is added and the mixture is stirred for a further 15 minutes, poured into saturated NH 4 Cl (30 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2×50 mL). Organic phases are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 , and concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is purified by flash chromatography to give the product. compound 154.  
      Compound 155  
      Compound 154 (1 mmol) is dissolved in 1 mL of dioxan and a solution of thiophenol (10 mmol) and triethylamine (10 mmol) in dioxan (5 mL) is added. The mixture is stirred for 16 hours. It is then concentrated in vacuo, redissolved in 2 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and added dropwise to 300 mL of petroleum ether with stirring. The precipitate is collected after decanting and is redissolved in 2 mL of CH 2 Cl 2  and again added dropwise to another 300 mL of petroleum ether with stirring. The precipitate is again collected after decanting, redissolved in 20 mL of EtOAc, 5% Pd—C (10 weight %) is added and the mixture is stirred at room temperature under an atmosphere of hydrogen until uptake of hydrogen is complete. The catalyst is removed by filtration through a pad of celite, washing with methanol. The filtrate is collected, concentrated in vacuo and a solution of this hydrogenated compound (1 mmol) and ammonium hydroxide (10 mL) in methanol (10 mL) is heated in a sealed tube for overnight. After completion of the reaction solvents are removed in vacuo and the product is purified by reverse phase HPLC to give compound 155.  
      The foregoing is intended as illustrative of the present invention but not limiting. Numerous variations and modifications may be effected without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention.